JP5901034B1 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

An object of the present invention is to prevent an unintended control process from being executed based on data before power is turned off when the power is turned off. Input port level data storage means for storing data indicating on / off of an input port; and input port falling data storage means for storing falling data indicating that the input port has been turned off. Is provided. At the time of recovery from power interruption, the main process generates the data of the input port level data storage means and the data of the input port falling data storage means (steps S836 and S837), and after generating these data, performs the interrupt process. Execute (step S840). In the interrupt processing, input port signal reading processing is periodically executed to update the data in the input port level data storage means and the input port falling data storage means. [Selection] Figure 36

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that prevents an unintended control process from being executed when returning from a power failure.

  In a conventional gaming machine, even when a power interruption occurs, the RWM data is not erased, and when the power is turned on (when returning from a power interruption), a gaming machine that executes a notification corresponding to the abnormality Is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2013-094356 A

In the above-described conventional technique, if the RWM data is not erased due to the power interruption, an unintended control process may be executed upon recovery from the power interruption.
Specifically, for example, when the setting change switch is in the ON state, the power is cut off, and the setting change switch is turned off while the power is turned off. Then, when the power is turned on, the setting change switch is turned on when the power is turned off. May remain, and control processing based on the setting change switch being on may be executed.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to prevent an unintended control process from being executed based on data before power-off at the time of recovery from power-off.

The present invention solves the above problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The present invention
The main process (M_MAIN) that controls the progress of the game,
During execution of the main process, it is possible to execute an interrupt process (I_INTR) that executes a process different from the main process by an interrupt,
An input port (input port 1) to which a signal of a setting key switch (52) operated when confirming a set value is input;
Input port level data storage means (F00A; input port 1 level data) for storing data indicating ON / OFF of the setting key switch ;
Input port falling data storage means (F00C; input port 1 falling data) for storing falling data indicating that the setting key switch has been turned from on to off;
It is possible to shift to a predetermined state in which the setting value can be confirmed based on the operation of the setting key switch (a setting confirmation state that shifts to “Yes” in step S411),
Based on the falling data of the setting key switch, the predetermined state can be ended (“Yes” in step S416),
When recovering from power- off, before executing the interrupt process, the main process determines the data of the input port level data storage means and the input port fall based on the signal input to the input port. Update the data in the data storage means (steps S836, S837),
After the update, the interrupt process can be executed (step S840),
By the interrupt processing after the update, the data of the input port level data storage means and the data of the input port falling data storage means are updated again based on the signal input to the input port ( In step S607), the data stored in the input port falling data storage means when the power supply is restored from the power interruption is updated to the latest data .

According to the first aspect of the present invention, when the power supply is recovered from the interruption, the interrupt processing can be executed after the data in the input port level data storage means and the input port falling data storage means are updated to the latest state . Then, the data in the input port level data storage means and the input port falling data storage means is updated again by the interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unintended control process from being executed when the power supply is recovered from a power interruption.

It is an external perspective view showing a slot machine (game machine) of the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the front cover of the slot machine as viewed from the inner surface side (seen from the player side) in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view of the inside of the base body viewed from the player side with the front cover opened in FIG. 1. It is a top view which expands and shows the storage number display LED, the acquisition number display LED, and information display LED in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of control of the slot machine in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the input ports 0-2 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the output ports 3-6 provided in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the example of a production | generation of rising data and falling data. It is a figure which shows some data (input port 0 level data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (input port 1 level data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (input port 1 falling data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (specific information flags etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (input monitoring counter etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows a part of data (an operation state flag etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows the one part data (LED number display LED signal data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (external signal output time etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure which shows some data (automatic insertion number data etc.) of the storage area of RWM. It is a figure (time chart etc.) explaining medal insertion or payout signal. It is a figure explaining the update of a medal payout signal. It is a time chart which shows a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal. It is a time chart which shows the external signals 1-3. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the front mask part (front door. Not shown) of a slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, and an effective line. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a combination. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a combination. It is a figure which shows the combination of the symbol corresponding to the kind of combination, the number of payout, and a combination. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of winning, a winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of winning, a winning combination, and a pushing order. It is a figure (role lottery table) which shows the type of winning and the winning probability (number) for each gaming state. It is a figure which shows the number and the medal acquisition expected value for every pushing order at the time of Bell A1-B4 winning. It is a figure which shows the transition of a game state and an internal state. It is a flowchart which shows the process (M_PRG_START) when starting the program by a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22. It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET). It is a flowchart which shows the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) in step S503. It is a flowchart which shows the power supply return process (M_POWER_ON) of step S23. It is a flowchart which shows the input port 0-2 reading process (SS_IN_READ). It is a flowchart which shows the unrecoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) of step S24. It is a flowchart which shows the main process (M_MAIN) process in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S52. It is a flowchart which shows the game state set (MS_ACTION_SET) in step S121. It is a flowchart which shows the game status output (MS_STATUS_OUT) in step S128. It is a flowchart which shows medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START). 10 is a flowchart showing medal reading processing (S_PLAYM_READ). It is a flowchart which shows storage number reading (S_CREDIT_READ). It is a flowchart which shows a blocker ON (MS_BLOCKER_ON). It is a flowchart which shows the addition process (MS_MEDAL_INC) of one medal. It is a flowchart which shows a medal limit number set processing (MS_MMAX_SET). It is a flowchart which shows medal insertion waiting (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S55. It is a flowchart which shows the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S56. It is a flowchart which shows the care medal check process (MS_INSERT_CHK) in step S222. It is a flowchart following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF). It is a flowchart which shows 1 storage number addition (MS_CREDIT_ADD). It is a flowchart which shows the storage bet process (MS_BET_IN) in step S223. It is a flowchart which shows the number of stored sheets 1 subtraction process (MS_CREDIT_DEC). It is a flowchart which shows the adjustment process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S221. It is a flowchart which shows the stored medal settlement process (MS_CREDIT_RET) in step S325. It is a flowchart which shows payout processing (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) of one medal. 60 is a flowchart following on from FIG. 59. It is a flowchart which shows an error display (MS_ERROR_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows a start switch reception process (MS_START_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning. It is a flowchart which shows an interrupt process (I_INTR). It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process (IS_POWER_DOWN) in step S618. It is a flowchart which shows an input error check process (IS_ERROR_CHK). It is a flowchart following FIG. It is a figure which shows an error number, the kind of error, and the content. It is a flowchart which shows an input error set process (IS_ERROR_SET). It is a flowchart which shows control command transmission (IS_CMD_SET) in step S613. It is a flowchart which shows external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL). It is a flowchart which shows an external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT). It is a flowchart which shows the program start process of a sub control board, and the main process of the sub side. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in a sub control board. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change start process in a sub control board.

In the present specification, the meanings of terms are as follows.
The “game medium” refers to a medium used for a game, and is a “medal (game medal)” in the present embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball can be used. In addition to the actual medals, the game media include game media (data related to the game media) that are electrically stored (credit, stored) inside the gaming machine.
“Game media” is called “number”, and “medal” is called “number”.
“Bet” refers to betting a medal (game medium) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the maximum bet number (limit number) in one game is set to 3 in the normal game and 2 in the 1BB game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the maximum bet number during 1BB game can be set to 1 or 3 (same as the normal game).
The “specified number” refers to the number of medals that can be operated by the start switch 41, that is, the game can be started, and is different from the “limit number” that is the maximum bet number in the game.

  “Reservation” refers to crediting a medal into the slot machine 10, unlike the “bet”. “Storage” may be used to include a bet, but in this specification, “storage” is used to mean that “bet” is not included. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of sheets that can be stored (upper limit number) is set to 50 regardless of the gaming state or the like.

“Care” means that a player directly inserts medals from a medal insertion slot 44 described later.
The “care bet” means that the player bets a medal (adds the number of bets) by cleaning the medal from the medal insertion slot 44.
“Maintenance storage” means that a player stores medals by adding medals from the medal insertion slot 44 (adds the number of credits (stored number)).
“Bet medal” means a bet medal.
“Reserved medals” refers to medals stored as credits.

The “reserved bet” is a game in which a player operates a bet switch 40, which will be described later, to play a part or all of the medals stored as credits within a possible bet range of the game. To bet.
“Automatic bet” means that when a replay wins, the number of medals bet in the previous game is automatically bet by the internal control processing of the slot machine 10. Note that the maintenance bet medals, the stored bets medals, and the stored medals can be settled thereafter, but the medals that are automatically bet by the replay winning are set so that the settlement cannot be performed.

“Inserting” means betting or storing medals, including the above-described care bets, care storage, storage bets, and automatic bets.
“Checkout” refers to paying out a bet medal and / or a stored medal to a player.

“Payout” means that a medal is paid out by payment or a medal is paid out to a player based on a winning combination. Furthermore, when a medal is paid out to a player based on a winning combination, it means to store it as a credit or to pay out an actual medal from the payout port 14. The payout in the present embodiment is controlled so that 50 sheets are stored as the limit number, and medals for which the stored number exceeds 50 are paid out to the player based on winning combinations. The “acquired number” indicating the number of medals that the player acquires by winning a combination is synonymous with the number of payouts.
Also, “medal swallowing” means that when a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 44, the medal is not bet or stored correctly in a state where the blocker 47 is on (the medal is not returned). Say.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is an external perspective view showing a slot machine 10 (game machine) according to the present embodiment.
FIG. 2 is a front view of the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 in FIG. 1 as viewed from the inner surface side (seen from the player side).
Further, FIG. 3 is a front view of the inside of the base portion 12 as viewed from the player side with the front cover 11 opened in FIG.
In the following description of FIGS. 1 to 3, the arrangement of each device provided in the slot machine 10 will be mainly described, and a specific description of each device will be given in FIG. 4 (block diagram) to be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the housing of the slot machine 10 includes a front cover 11 (also referred to as “front door”) and a base portion 12 (“back box” or “cabinet” whose front side is closed by the front cover 11. ")"). Although not shown in FIG. 1, when the front cover 11 is opened, the opening is detected by a door switch 16 described later.

The front cover 11 is attached to the base portion 12 so as to be openable and closable so as to cover the front surface (opening surface) of the base portion 12. As shown in FIG. 1, on the player side of the front cover 11, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, three stop switches 42, a medal slot 44, and the like are arranged. Further, a storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and a status display LED 73 are provided on the left side of the bet switch 40.
A display window 13 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front cover 11 so that a part of the reel 31 disposed therein can be seen through.
Note that a storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and an information display LED 73 may be provided on the display window 13 (for example, on the left side of the viewing area of the reel 31). In this case, a display substrate 70 described later is disposed on the back side of the display window 13.

Furthermore, an effect lamp 21 (the lamp provided on the front cover 11 may be referred to as a frame lamp 21) is arranged in a substantially frame shape on the upper part and the side part of the front cover 11. Further, an image display device 23 is provided above the display window 13, and speakers 22 are arranged on both sides thereof.
Further, a medal payout port 14 and a medal tray 15 are provided at a lower portion of the front cover 11. Furthermore, speakers 22 are also provided on both sides of the medal payout opening 14.

  As shown in FIG. 2, on the back surface side of the front cover 11, a transparent substrate case 19 is provided so as to overlap the image display device 23 in the upper part of the display window 13, that is, the portion where the image display device 23 is disposed. Is provided. A sub control board (sub control means) 80 is arranged in the board case 19.

  On the other hand, the base portion 12 is constructed by assembling wood or the like into a hollow box shape having an open front side. As shown in FIG. 3, a medal payout device including a power supply unit 50 having a power switch 51 for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10 and a hopper tank 35a in the lower portion of the base portion 12 is provided. 35 is provided. In FIG. 3, a sub tank 35 b for receiving medals overflowing from the hopper 35 a is arranged on the right side of the hopper 35 a.

  A plate-shaped reel base is fixed to the upper part of the medal payout device 35, and a symbol display device 30 including three reels 31 is provided on the reel base. A symbol is arranged on the reel 31 as will be described later, and the symbol on the reel 31 is visible to the player through the display window 13.

Furthermore, a transparent substrate case 17 is provided on the inner surface side of the base body 12 and above the symbol display device 30, and a main control substrate (main control means) 60 is disposed in the substrate case 17. Yes. In order to prevent the main control board 60 from being illegal (ROM exchange or the like), the board case 17 is caulked, welded (welded with ultrasonic waves, welded with a UV curing agent, or electrically heated) after the main control board 60 is accommodated inside. It is sealed by welding or the like. The main control board 60 is electrically connected to the above-described sub control board 80 by a harness or an optical fiber (bundle of electric wiring) (not shown).
A set value display LED 63 (seven segment LED) for displaying the set value is mounted on the main control board 60.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a transparent door (setting door) 18 is provided adjacent to the right side of the substrate case 17, and a board (main main board) different from the main control board 60 is provided inside the door 18. A board electrically connected to the control board 60). A setting key switch 52 and a setting change / reset switch 53 are mounted on the board. Therefore, the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53 are covered by the door 18. A setting door switch 54 (described later) is provided for detecting whether the door 18 is opened or closed.

FIG. 4 is an enlarged plan view showing the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, and the state display LED 73 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 2, these LEDs 71 to 73 are mounted on the display substrate 70.
The storage number display LED 71 is an LED that displays the number of stored medals, and is composed of two seven-segment displays (so-called 7-segment) in order to display two digits.
In this embodiment, the storage number display LED 71 displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).

  For example, when the bet number is 0 and the stored number is 0, the display of the stored number display LED 71 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (when the bet limit number is three). Therefore, when the limit number is three and the previous bet number is zero, if there are up to three medals, the medal is bet and not stored. If medals continue to be maintained, the medals are stored and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 71.

  Therefore, for example, when the number of bet medals is 0 and the number of stored medals is 0, when the limit number of bets in the game is 3, if 4 medals are inserted from the medal insertion slot 44, A medal is bet and one medal is stored. As a result, “01” is displayed on the storage number display LED 71.

  In this embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED 71), medals are not stored any more. In this state, if a medal is maintained from the medal insertion slot 44, the blocker 47 returns the maintained medal from the payout slot 14.

The acquisition number display LED 72 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (player acquisition number) at the time of winning a winning combination. Like the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72 includes two seven-segment displays.
The acquisition number display LED 72 normally displays the number of acquisitions, but functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of an error when an error occurs, and may be referred to as an “acquisition number (or error) display LED 72”. .

The acquisition number display LED 72 is “00” when there is no medal to be paid out. For example, when one bell described later wins and one medal is paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is: From “00” to “01”.
The acquired number display LED 72 may be controlled to be turned off when there are no medals to be paid out.

  Here, when a combination with a medal payout (excluding replay) wins and a medal corresponding to the combination is paid out, the medal is stored in preference to being paid out from the payout port 14. For example, when the stored number before winning the bell 02 is “10”, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is updated from “00” to “01” and the storage number display LED 71 is displayed. Is updated from “10” to “11”.

  Furthermore, if the number of stored sheets exceeds 50 at the time of winning a winning combination, the portion exceeding 50 is paid out from the payout opening 14. For example, if the number of reserves is 47 before winning the winning combination and 8 medals are paid out by winning the bell 01, 3 are stored and the number of reserves is 50, which is equivalent to exceeding 50 The five sheets are paid out from the payout opening 14.

  Further, at the time of replay winning, medals are not stored and paid out, and the number of medals bet in the game are automatically bet for replay. For example, if the game is played with 2 bets (2) and a replay wins, 2 medals are automatically bet. Similarly, when the game is played with 3 bets (3 cards) and the replay wins, 3 medals are automatically bet. Since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of medals for replaying, even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter, the medals cannot be settled. In addition, it is possible to insert medals after a replay win, and the inserted medals are stored as credits.

  In addition, in the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval”, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is stopped on the active line, a game to be performed without giving a medal or the like is given. It is interpreted that it is not “winning (displaying a combination of symbols for obtaining medals etc.)”. However, in the present application (this specification and the like), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying game), and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”.

Moreover, the status display LED 73 includes seven LEDs 73a to 73g shown in FIG. 4 in the present embodiment.
The replay display LED 73a is an LED that is lit when a replay is won. When an automatic bet based on a replay win is made, the replay display LED 73a is lit to inform the player that the bet is in an automatic state.

The insertion-possible display LED 73b is an LED that lights when a medal can be inserted (bet). That is, it lights up before the game is finished and a medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In the present embodiment, even after the replay is activated, it lights up when a bet can be made according to the number of stored items.
In the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is an LED that is lit during the settlement process. When the settlement switch 43 is turned on in a state where there is a stored medal and / or a bet medal (excluding an automatic bet at the time of replay winning), it lights up while the medal is actually paid out.

  The game start LED 73d is an LED that is lit when a specified number of medals are bet and the start switch 41 is operable. Therefore, it does not light up when a prescribed number of medals are not bet (or when replay is not automatically inserted). In this embodiment, when the limit number is “2”, the specified number is “2”, and when the limit number is “3”, the specified number is “3”. Yes.

  The (1, 2, 3) insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet. When one medal is bet, the one-insertion display LED 73e is lit. When two medals are bet, the one-insertion display LED 73e and the two-insertion display LED 73f are lit, and three medals are displayed. When a bet is placed, the 1-sheet insertion display LED 73e, the 2-sheet insertion display LED 73f, and the 3-sheet insertion display LED 73g are lit.

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
The slot machine 10 includes the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 as described above.
The main control board 60 has input ports (0 to 2) and output ports (0 to 6), and includes an RWM (main memory) 61, a main CPU 62, and the like (it does not mean that only what is illustrated in FIG. 5 is included). ).

In practice, an MPU including a main CPU 62, an RWM 61, a ROM, and a register is mounted on the main control board 60. Note that the ROM may include an external ROM in addition to the one mounted in the MPU. On the other hand, the RWM 61 is provided only in the MPU according to current rules. Further, an RWM can be provided outside the MPU for a sub control board 80 to be described later.
Therefore, the main CPU 62 is used to include MPU.
The term RWM 61 (storage means) is used to include the RWM 61 with built-in MPU, ROM (internal / external), and register (storage circuit).

The main control board 60 and peripheral devices for game progress including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via an input port or an output port. The input port is a connection unit to which signals such as operation switches are input, and the output port is a connection unit that transmits signals to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 5, the input peripheral device displays a signal from the peripheral device as an arrow directed to the main control board 60, and the output peripheral device is directed from the main control board 60 to the peripheral device. Shown with arrows.

The RWM (main memory) 61 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data based on the progress of the game.
The ROM is a storage medium that stores programs necessary for the progress of the game, various data (for example, a data table), and the like.
The main CPU 62 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 60, and executes programs and calculations necessary for the progress of the game. Specifically, the lottery of the role, the drive control of the reel 31, and the winning Execute paying out.

The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 44 are configured to pass through the medal selector 45.
As shown in FIG. 5, the medal selector 45 includes a passage sensor 46, a blocker 47, and insertion sensors 48 a and 48 b (but not limited to these), and is electrically connected to the main control board 60. Yes.
When a medal is inserted from the medal slot 44, the passage sensor 46 first detects the medal.

Further, a blocker 47 is provided on the downstream side of the passage sensor 46. The blocker 47 is provided in the medal passage, and is used to allow / disallow medal passage (insertion). When the medal insertion is not permitted, the blocker 47 is inserted from the medal insertion slot 44. A medal passage for returning medals from the payout port 14 is formed. On the other hand, when the medal insertion is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 44 to the hopper 35a is formed.
As will be described later, as a state of the blocker 47, a state where the insertion of medals is permitted is referred to as an on state, and a state where the insertion of medals is not permitted is referred to as an off state.

  Here, the blocker 47 does not allow the insertion of medals during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reels 31 until all the reels 31 are stopped and the payout corresponding to the winning combination is completed at the time of winning the winning combination). ) State. That is, the blocker 47 permits the insertion of medals at least when no game is being played.

  On the further downstream side of the blocker 47, input sensors 48a and 48b (optical sensors) are provided. Therefore, medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 44 are further detected by the insertion sensors 48a (upstream side) and 48b (downstream side) after being detected by the passage sensor 46. In the following description, as shown in FIG. 5, the upstream closing sensor 48a may be referred to as closing sensor 1 and the downstream closing sensor 48b may be referred to as closing sensor 2.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 60 is electrically provided with a settlement switch 43, a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, and a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42 as operation switches operated by the player. It is connected to the.

The settlement switch 43 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (paying out) medals stored (credited) in the slot machine 10.
The bet switch 40 is a switch operated by the player when betting a stored medal for the game. In this embodiment, the bet switch 40 includes a 1-bet switch 40a for betting one piece (the minimum number in one game) and a 3-bet switch 40b for betting the maximum number of medals that can be bet in the game. Prepare.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a bet switch for two bets may be provided. Of the bet switches 40 for one, two, and three bets, two or three can be provided depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10.

The “number of bets corresponding to the bet switch” means 1 when the bet switch is the 1 bet switch 40a and 3 when the bet switch is the 3 bet switch 40b. When a bet switch for two bets is provided, the number of bets corresponding to the bet switch is two.
Since the 3-bet switch 40b is a bet switch that adds the maximum number of bets that can be made at any time, it is also referred to as a max bet switch. In the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, it is referred to as a 3-bet switch 40b.

Here, as described above, the limit number of one game is two during the 1BB game, and is three when the game is not during the 1BB game (normal game).
For example, in a normal game, when the number of medals already bet (the number of existing bets) is 0, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and the stored number is 3 or more, 3 bets are bet. .
In a normal game, when the number of already bet is 0, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and the number of reserves is 2, the maximum possible bet is 2, so 2 Bet.

Furthermore, in the normal game, when the number of already bet is 1, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and the stored number is 2 or more, the maximum betable number is 2, so 2 A bet is placed (added to the previous bet number).
Further, in the normal game, when the number of already bet is 3, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the number of bets that can be added (added) is 0 even when the reserve number is available. The bet number is not added.

Further, in the normal game, when the number of already bet is one and the number of reserved is one, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the maximum number that can be bet is one. A bet is placed. As a result, one bet number is newly added to the existing bet number, and the bet number after the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b becomes two.
Furthermore, in the 1BB game, when the bet number is 0, when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated and the stored number is 2 or more, the maximum betable number is 2, so 2 A bet is placed.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all of left, middle, and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle, and right) reels 31 and are operated by the player when the corresponding reels 31 are stopped.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a display substrate 70 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 60. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 60 and the display board 70, and the main control board 60 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 70 are connected. In FIG. 5, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. Thus, the main control board 60 and the display board 70 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another board may be interposed between them.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected (via a harness or the like), but may be connected via another separate board (a relay board or the like). For example, one or more other boards (such as relay boards) may be interposed between the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80.

  The display substrate 70 is connected to the above-described storage number display LED 71, acquired number display LED 72, and status display LED 73. As shown in FIG. 1, these LEDs 71 to 73 are provided at a left end portion of an operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. It is not necessary that all the LEDs 71 to 73 are provided on one display substrate 70. For example, a plurality of display substrates 70 such as display substrates 70A, 70B,. Any of the LEDs 71 to 73 may be provided.

  Furthermore, a storage number display LED 71, an acquisition number display LED 72, and an information display LED 73 can be provided on the display window 13 (for example, on the left side of the viewing area of the reel 31). In this case, the display substrate 70 is disposed on the back side of the display window 13.

The main control board 60 is electrically connected to the motor 32 of the symbol display device 30 and the like.
The symbol display device 30 includes a reel 31 (three in this embodiment) that displays symbols, a motor 32 that drives each reel 31, and a reel sensor 39 that detects the position of the reel 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the center of rotation of each reel 31, and is controlled by a reel control means 62 c described later. Here, the reel 31 includes a left reel 31, a middle reel 31, and a right reel 31, and a stop switch 42 that is operated when the left reel 31 is stopped is the left stop switch 42, and when the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 to be operated when stopping the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

  The reel 31 is ring-shaped, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination) is attached is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of symbols on the reel 31 will be described later (FIG. 22).

  Each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) index. The index is provided in a convex shape on, for example, the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used when detecting whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has rotated one time, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 39. The signal of the reel sensor 39 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. When the reel sensor 39 detects (cuts) the index, the input signal is input to the main control board 60, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 39 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in the RWM 61 (main ROM). Thereby, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.
The medal payout device 35 is electrically connected to the main control board 60. The medal payout device 35 detects a medal paid out from the hopper 35a, a hopper 35a for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that is driven when paying out medals of the hopper 35a from the payout port 14. Dispensing sensors 37a and 37b are provided.

The medals that are maintained and received from the medal slot 44 are formed so as to be accommodated in the hopper 35a through a predetermined passage (also referred to as “chute portion”).
The payout sensors 37a and 37b are provided with a payout sensor 37a on the upstream side and a payout sensor 37b on the downstream side, similarly to the input sensors 48a and 48b.

  The payout sensors 37a and 37b are arranged at a predetermined distance, and are configured to be detected by the payout sensor 37b after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal was detected by the payout sensor 37a. Then, based on the timing when the payout sensors 37a and 37b are turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been paid out correctly.

For example, when the signals of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are both off despite the hopper motor 36 being driven, it is determined that no medal has been paid out, and a hopper error (no medal) is detected. Is done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals from the payout sensor 37a or 37b remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred. Note that only one payout sensor 37 may be provided to detect the error.

  The full sensor 38 is a sensor that detects the fullness of the sub tank 35b (see FIG. 3) that stores medals overflowing from the hopper 35a, and is a circuit that is energized when the medals come into contact when the medals in the sub tank 35b become full. Consists of

The door switch 16 is a switch that is turned on when the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 is opened, and detects the open / closed state of the front cover 11.
The power switch 51 is a switch for turning on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 52 is a switch that is turned on when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot and is rotated 90 degrees to the right, and is turned on when the setting is confirmed or the setting is changed.

The setting change / reset switch 53 is a switch that serves as both a setting change switch and a reset switch. Note that the setting change switch and the reset switch may be provided separately.
The setting change / reset switch 53 is operated when changing a setting value. When the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, reset, that is, initialization processing is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 61 is cleared.

  The setting door switch 54 is a switch that detects opening / closing of the setting door (the door that covers the setting key switch 52 and the setting change / reset switch 53). For example, an error occurs when the setting door switch 54 is off, that is, when the setting key switch 52 is on while the setting door is not opened.

FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the input ports 0 to 2 provided on the main control board 60. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating output ports 3 to 6 provided on the main control board 60. In addition, about the output ports 0-2, the description using drawing is omitted.
The input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 0 to 6 of this embodiment are 1-byte ports to which 8 bits D0 to D7 can be input or output.
The input port and the output port are provided in addition to those shown in the figure, but the description thereof is omitted in this embodiment.

  6 and 7, a port indicated as unused means a signal input / output port that is not actually used or a description of which is omitted in the present embodiment (a port without signal input / output). Does not mean all unused).

  In the input ports 0 to 2 and the output ports 3 to 6 shown in FIG. 6 and FIG. 7, “positive” and “negative” mean signals that are input or output, for example, the D0 bit of the input port 0 (specific In the adjustment switch signal in the following description, it is also referred to as a “bit”, but when it is not operated, a “high” signal is input to the D0 bit and the operation is performed. When this is done, a “low” signal is input to the D0 bit. In other words, the “negative” signal is the active signal. On the other hand, in the case of a 3-bet switch signal, for example, a “negative” signal is input to the D2 bit when not operated, and a “high” signal is input to the D2 bit when operated. In other words, a “high” signal is an active signal.

  Furthermore, at the input port 0, the adjustment switch signal and the 1-bet switch signal are both negative signals when the switch is operated, but the 3-bet switch signal is a positive signal when the switch is operated. Is entered. This is because in the present embodiment, different switches are used for the settlement switch 43, the 1-bet switch 40a, and the 3-bet switch 40b.

For example, the settlement switch 43 and the 1-bet switch 40a are button switches that detect grounding / non-grounding when pressed (or pressed), and are switches that include a circuit through which a current flows when pressed. On the other hand, the 3-bet switch 40b is a button switch with a built-in photosensor, and the voltage changes when the light receiving element of the photosensor blocks light on the light emitting element side by the light shielding piece.
As described above, switches having different structures are employed even for the same bet switch 40 in accordance with the design convenience. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and switches having the same structure can be used.

The input port 0 receives signals from an adjustment switch 43, which is an operation switch, a bet switch 40 (1-bet switch 40a and 3-bet switch 40b), a start switch 41, and a (left, middle, right) stop switch 42. .
The input port 1 receives signals from the passage sensor 46, the door switch 16, the setting door switch 54, the setting key switch 52, the setting change / reset switch 53, and the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39. . When the slot machine 10 is not provided with the setting door switch 54, the D2 bit of the input port 1 is not used.
Furthermore, the input port 2 has a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), a signal from the input sensors 1 (48a) and 2 (48b), and a dispensing sensor 1 (37a) and 2 (37b). ) Signal and the full sensor 38 signal are input.

  As will be described later, main processing (main loop) (M_MAIN) that is performed once per game is provided as information processing for proceeding with the game. The main process is a process in which a care medal check process performed based on detection of inserted medals, a winning process after all reels 31 are stopped, and the like are performed.

  During this main process, the main process is temporarily exited and an interrupt process (timer interrupt process) is executed. In the interrupt process, a process for detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S607 in FIG. 64 described later) is executed, and after the process is executed, the process returns to the main process periodically. The interval of the interrupt time is 2.235 ms in this embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt process at intervals of 2.235 ms. Based on the acquired data, the input port level data (data indicating ON / OFF of each bit), the input port rising data (which was off at the previous interrupt and turned on at the current interrupt) Bit data) and input port falling data (data indicating which bit is the data that was turned on at the previous interrupt and turned off at the current interrupt) is generated and stored. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

In the present embodiment, level data and rising data are generated for the input port 0. For the input port 1, level data, rising data, and falling data are generated. Furthermore, for the input port 2, only level data is generated. This is because, for the input port 1, since the operation signal of the setting key switch 52 is input, it is necessary to detect that the input port 1 is turned off.
On the other hand, since the input port 2 is an input signal from various sensors, it is only necessary to perform control based on the input from the sensor, so that it is not necessary to generate rising data.

  Also, all D0 to D7 bits of the input ports 0 to 2 are detected regardless of when the interrupt processing is performed. For example, while the reel 31 is rotating (before the stop switch 42 is operated), the player cannot operate the bet switch 40 (betting processing is not executed based on the operation). Although it is not always necessary to acquire the data of the D1 and D2 bits of the input port 0, in the present invention, the data of all bits is acquired. If all bits of data are acquired, error determination can be performed. Furthermore, even when the reel 31 is rotating, it is not necessary to make a determination such as not acquiring it while the reel 31 is rotating by executing this processing, so that the program capacity (ROM) can be reduced.

Furthermore, for example, when the rising data of the bet switch 40 is turned on while the reel 31 is rotating, control is performed so as to change the effect executed on the sub-control board 80 side, or the rotation mode of the reel 31 is changed. And so on.
As described above, if 1 byte data (8 bits) of the input port 0 is acquired, not only the on / off state of all the operation switches can be known, but also the effect of reducing the program capacity and the effect of the production control can be achieved. It can also be used as a trigger for changes.

  In FIG. 7, at the output port 3, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the left reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits. The motor 32 of this embodiment is configured to rotate the reel 31 by 1-2 phase excitation, and the reel 31 is driven by a combination of four-phase excitations of φ0 to φ3. Are respectively output from predetermined bits.

Also, the signal of the blocker 47 is output from the D6 bit. Furthermore, a drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is output from the D7 bit.
Here, when the signal of the blocker is “1” (ON), the blocker 47 forms a medal passage connecting the medal insertion port 44 and the hopper 35a and permits the acceptance of the medal. On the other hand, when it is “0” (off), a passage (return passage) connecting the medal insertion slot 44 and the payout slot 14 is formed, and acceptance of medals is not permitted.
For example, when the blocker 47 is driven, a blocker signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 3 by interrupt processing.

From the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 4, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the middle reel 31 are output. Similarly, the φ0 to φ3 signals of the motor 32 of the right reel 31 are output from the D0 to D3 bits of the output port 5.
Further, from the D5 to D7 bits of the output port 4, the signals of the 1 to 3 sheet insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g in the status display LED 73 are output.

Furthermore, an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 100 is output from the output port 6, and in this embodiment, external signals 1 to 5, a medal payout signal, and a medal insertion (bet) signal are output.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal to be output to the outside of the slot machine 10 (a hall computer, a data counter installed in the hall, etc.) via the external concentration terminal board 100. In the present embodiment, an external signal 1 indicating ART activation (first hit), an external signal 2 indicating ART continuation, an external signal 3 indicating the time from the start to the end of ART, an error or a power interruption occurring in the slot machine 10 There are provided an external signal 4 indicating that this has occurred and an external signal 5 indicating the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10.

However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the external signal 1 can be a signal indicating that 1BB game is in progress, or the external signal 2 can be set to a specific RT state. The external signals 1 to 3 are not necessarily limited to ART. is not.
Although details of these output signals will be described later, in this embodiment, a signal output from the output port 6 is stored in the B register and becomes “external output signal data”.

Next, level data, rising data, and rising data generated based on signals input from the input ports 0 to 2 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 6, positive or negative signals are input to D0 to D7 (except D4) of the input port 0. After acquiring the signal input to the input port 0, positive logic is obtained. Alternatively, data after conversion (calculation) to negative logic is stored as input port 0 level data. For example, in the input port 0, a negative signal is input to the D0, D1, and D3 bits at the time of operation, “1” when the input signal is “negative”, and “0” when it is “positive”. Operate so that

  On the other hand, in the input port 0, a positive signal is input to the D2, D5, D6, and D7 bits at the time of operation. Therefore, when the input signal is “positive”, it is “1”. Arithmetic so as to be “0”.

The above logical conversion process will be described more specifically.
First, in order to unify the logics respectively input to the input ports 0 to 2, a negative logic bit corresponding to definition data (data stored in the ROM) is provided. For example, the negative logic bit of the input port 0 is “00001011” as described in FIG.
It is assumed that a signal is input to the input port 0. Here, it is assumed that the 1-bet switch 40a is turned on. When the 1-bet switch signal is on, a negative signal is input, so the input signal is “0”. If the other switches at the input port 0 are not operated, the settlement switch signal (D0 bit) and the start switch signal (D3 bit) are “1”, and the others are “0”.
Input data: 00000101
It becomes.
This input data is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register) in the MPU.

Next, a logical operation by exclusive OR (XOR) is performed on the input data and the input port 0 negative logic bit “00000101” corresponding to the definition data. This
00001001: Input data 00001011: Input port 0 negative logic bit 00000010: Post-computation data, and only the data (D1 bit) related to the operated 1-bet switch 40a is “1”.
By calculating as described above, it is possible to detect that only the 1-bet switch 40a has been operated.
The post-computation data, that is, “00000010” becomes “input port 0 level data” at the time of the interruption.

In addition, when there is an unused bit such as the D4 bit of the input port 0, the post-computation data and the definition data “11101111” are used to ensure that the data corresponding to the unused bit is “0”. (Data in which only unused bits are set to “0”) and “AND” operation (logical product) may be performed. This
00000010: Data after operation 11101111: Definition data 00000010: Data after operation (after AND)
It becomes.
When there are no unused bits, calculation up to the first post-computation data is sufficient, and post-computation data (after AND) need not be computed. In addition, even if there are unused bits, it is possible to end the calculation after the first calculation data, and the calculation after calculation (after AND) is performed in order to more surely remove noise. Is called.

As described above, the input port 0 level data, the input port 1 level data, and the input port 2 level data are created based on the signals of the input ports 0 to 2 during one interrupt process.
The input port 1 level data is obtained by performing an exclusive OR (XOR) operation on the actually input signal and the input port 1 negative logic bit “00010001” shown in FIG.
The input port 2 level data is obtained by performing an exclusive OR (XOR) operation on the actually input signal and the input port 2 negative logic bit “00101111” shown in FIG.
The created input port 0 level data to input port 2 level data are stored in a predetermined address (described later) in the RWM 61.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, input port 0 rising data is created from input port 0 level data. Also, input port 1 rising data and input port 1 falling data are created from the input port 1 level data.
FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a calculation example for creating rising data and falling data of the input port 1.

  In FIG. 8, the input port 1 level data (data B0) at the previous interrupt is “00000010” (only the D1 bit door switch signal is on), and the input port 1 level data (data A0) at the current interrupt is “ 0000110 ”(D1 bit door switch signal and D2 bit set door switch signal are on). Therefore, the setting door switch signal is an example having a rising edge.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 8, first, an operation using exclusive OR (XOR) is performed on data A0 (level data at the time of the current interruption) and data B0 (level data at the time of the previous interruption). When the calculation result is data C0, the data C0 is data indicating a change bit of the input port 1.
Next, an operation is performed on the data A0 (level data at the time of the current interruption) and the data C0 (data indicating the change bit) by AND (AND). The data D0 thus created becomes the input port 1 rising data.

In addition, when calculating the fall, the following calculation is performed.
The input port 1 level data (data B1) at the previous interrupt is “00000010” (only the D1 bit door switch signal is ON), and the input port 1 level data (data A1) at the current interrupt is “00000000” (all In this example, the bit is turned off. Therefore, it is an example which has a fall about a door switch signal.

In this case, first, an operation by exclusive OR (XOR) is performed on the data A1 (level data at the time of the current interruption) and the data B1 (level data at the time of the previous interruption). Assuming that the operation result is data C1, the data C1 is data indicating a change bit of the input port 1 in the same manner as the data C0.
Next, an operation is performed on the data B1 (level data at the previous interruption) and the data C1 (data indicating the change bit) by AND (AND). The data D1 created thereby becomes the input port 1 falling data.

Furthermore, in the above example, the input port data is acquired once per interrupt. However, in order to prevent noise and chattering, the input port signal may be acquired multiple times within one interrupt. .
For example, taking input port 0 as an example, the data of input port 0 is acquired twice within one interrupt. The time interval when data is acquired twice is arbitrary, but for example, the second data is acquired after 50 μS (microseconds) has elapsed since the first data acquisition.

Specifically, when the D1 bit is turned on by operating the 1-bet switch 40a,
00000100: Acquisition data first time (normal)
00000100: Acquisition data second time (normal)
Suppose that In the above example, normal data is acquired both in the first time and the second time, and there is no change in both data. Then, an arithmetic operation using AND of these two data is executed. as a result,
00000100: After AND operation. The data after the AND operation is set as level data at the time of the interrupt processing.

On the other hand, when noise or chattering occurs and the acquired data becomes abnormal twice, the following occurs. For example, when the signal of the 3-bet switch 40b is erroneously detected at the second data acquisition and becomes “1”,
00000100: Acquisition data first time (normal)
00000110: Acquisition data second time (abnormal)
It becomes. And, when both data are subjected to a logical product (AND) operation as described above,
0000100: After AND operation, the same result as above is obtained. That is, by performing the AND operation, the D1 bit of the second acquisition data can be set to “0”, thereby preventing noise, chattering, and the like.

9 to 17 are diagrams showing the storage addresses of the data stored in the RWM 61 and the contents thereof. The data shown in FIGS. 9 to 17 is data used in the description of the present embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 61 is not limited to these data.
In FIG. 9, “_PT_IN0_OLD” of the address “F008” is a storage area for input port 0 level data. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 0 is read and calculated as described above, and then the level data is updated.
“_PT_IN0_UP” of the address “F009” is a storage area for input port 0 rising data. The calculation is performed every time the input port 0 level data is updated, and the rising data of the input port 0 is also updated.

In FIG. 10, “_PT_IN1_OLD” of the address “F00A” is a storage area for input port 1 level data. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 1 is read and calculated as described above, and then the data is updated.
In addition, “_PT_IN1_UP” of the address “F00B” is a storage area for input port 1 rising data. The calculation is performed every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the rising data of the input port 1 is also updated.

Furthermore, in FIG. 11, “_PT_IN1_DOWN” of the address “F00C” is a storage area for the falling data of the input port 1. The calculation is performed every time the input port 1 level data is updated, and the input port 1 falling data is also updated.
Further, “_PT_IN2_OLD” of the address “F00D” is a storage area for the input port 2 level data. For each interrupt process, the input signal from the input port 2 is read and calculated as described above, and then the data is updated.

In FIG. 12, “_FL_ERROR_INF” of the address “F00F” is a data storage area of the specific information flag. Here, in this embodiment, the specific information flag is door switch information (D1), setting door switch information (D2), setting key switch information (D3), setting / reset switch information (D4), and transmission at power-off recovery. It consists of bit (D6).
The door switch information (D1), the setting door switch information (D2), the setting key switch information (D3), and the setting / reset switch information (D4) correspond to each bit of the input port 1 level data. For example, when the ON state of the door switch 16 is detected, the D1 bit of the input port 1 level data is turned on (“1”). At the same time, the D1 bit of the specific information flag is turned on (“1”). ) The same applies to the setting key switch information (D3) and the setting / reset switch information (D4).

  The D6 bit “transmission bit at power recovery” is a flag that is on (“1”) until a predetermined time elapses after detection of recovery from power failure. The specific information flag is in one flag (in one byte data) in order to simultaneously determine whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed since the return from power-off and the on / off state of the switch relating to the above-described setting change. In addition, these pieces of information are stored. Therefore, by accessing the specific information flag and determining whether each bit is on or off, it is possible to simultaneously determine whether the switch related to the setting change is on or off and whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the return from power-off. Become.

  Further, “_FL_IN_ABNML” of the address “F010” is a data storage area of the abnormal input flag. In this embodiment, when the dwelling abnormality of the passage sensor 46 occurs in the D4 to D6 bit data, the input sensor 2 Turns on when an abnormal input (44b) occurs or when an abnormal input of the payout sensor 37 occurs.

In FIG. 13, “_CT_SEN_CHK” of the address “F012” is a data storage area of the input monitoring counter, and monitors passage abnormality detection of the passage sensor 46. In this embodiment, “1” is added to the input port 1 rising data (“_PT_IN1_UP” of the address “F00B”) when the passage sensor 46 (D0 bit) is “1” (step S908 in FIG. 66 described later). ), When it is determined that the medal has passed normally, “1” is subtracted (step S250 in FIG. 52 described later). Further, in order not to make this count value an accumulated value over a plurality of games, it is cleared in step S165 of FIG. 46 described later.
Further, “_WK_H0_CHK1” of the address “F013” is a storage area for the payout sensor 1 (37a) abnormality detection data, and is data for detecting an abnormal input to the payout sensor 1 (37a). The range is “0” to “4”, and is used when specifying the error number that occurred as will be described later.

  “_WK_H0_CHK2” of the address “F014” is a storage area for the payout sensor 2 (37b) abnormality detection data, and is data for detecting an abnormal input to the payout sensor 2 (37b). Similar to the above-described payout sensor 1 (37a) abnormality detection data, it is used when taking the range of “0” to “4” and specifying the generated error number.

  Furthermore, “_NB_CREDIT_LED” of the address “F019” is a storage area of the stored number display data, and stores the data for displaying the stored number at that time in the stored number display LED 71 described above. Here, in this embodiment, the data itself is a hexadecimal number (H), but a value obtained by converting the stored number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the stored number to be displayed is “29”, the value “29 (H)” is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F019”. As a result, the lower 4 bits of D0 to D3 of the address “F019” are used to display the lower digit (“9” in this example) of the stored number, and the upper 4 bits of D4 to D7 are used to indicate the stored number. It is stored as data for displaying the upper digit ("2" in this example). In the present embodiment, since the upper limit value of the number of stored sheets is “50”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.

Further, “_FL_MEDAL_STS” of the address “F01B” is a data storage area of a medal management flag. This medal management flag is a flag for mainly controlling the turning on / off of the status display LED 73. In the medal management flag, the D0 bit indicates the start switch 41 receiving state, and when the start switch 41 is received, that is, when the start switch 41 is operable (for example, a state before a bet is placed and a game is started). When it becomes “1” and the operation of the start switch 41 cannot be accepted (for example, while the reel 31 is rotating), it is set to “0”.
The blocker state of the D2 bit is data that is “1” when the blocker 47 is on and is “0” when it is off. By determining the value of this D2 bit, it is possible to determine what state the current blocker 47 is in (on or off).

The D3-bit replay display LED is data that is set to “1” when a replay is displayed and a medal is automatically inserted as a replay (step S144 in FIG. 43). When this data is “1”, the replay display LED 73a of the above-described status display LEDs 73 is lit. Further, the data is set to “0” when the game by re-game is completed (step S68 in FIG. 39). When this data is “0”, the replay display LED 73a is turned off.
The D4-bit settlement display LED is data that is set to “1” when the settlement switch 43 is operated to settle the stored medal (step S324 in FIG. 57). When this data is “1”, the settlement display LED 73c of the above-described status display LEDs 73 is turned on. Further, the data is set to “0” when the settlement of the stored medal is completed (step S326 in FIG. 57).

  As described above, in this embodiment, the adjustment display LED 73c is lit when the adjustment of the stored medals that can be stored up to 50 is executed. However, the bet medals and the stored medals are displayed at a time. When it is formed so as to be settled, it is preferably formed so as to be set to “1” when the bet or the stored medal is settled (so that the settlement display LED 73c is lit).

  The D6 bit setting change disable flag is data that is “0” when the setting can be changed, and is “1” otherwise. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated and the game is advanced (step S433 in FIG. 62), the data is set to “1”, and when the medal acceptance of the next game is started (FIG. 43). In step S136), the data is set to “0”. When the setting is changed, the value of the setting change permission flag is referred to. When the setting change disable flag is “1”, the setting change is not permitted. However, even if the setting change disable flag is “1”, if it is determined that the error cannot be recovered (for example, random number update abnormality determined for each interrupt process), the setting change is permitted and the setting change is not allowed. Based on this, it becomes possible to cancel the unrecoverable error.

  The D7-bit medal limit setting determination is data that is “1” when the bet medal number reaches the medal limit number, and is “0” when the medal limit number is not reached. As described above, in the present embodiment, the limit number is set to three during normal game and two during 1BB game, and these three or two are the medal limit number. Therefore, for example, in normal games, when the number of bet medals is 0, 1, or 2, the medal limit number is not reached, so it is “0”. When the number is 3, the medal limit number is reached. “1”.

In FIG. 14, “_FL_ACTION” of the address “F01C” is an operation state flag data storage area, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D1 bit.
For example, when a replay is won, the replay is activated, and the D0 bit is set to “1” when the game state is set (step S124 in FIG. 41). The D0 bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the game by re-game is finished (step S68 in FIG. 39).

  “_PT_BLK_HPM” of the address “F023” is a data storage area for the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal, and uses the D6 bit as the blocker signal and the D7 bit as the hopper motor drive signal (D0 to D5 bits are not used). . When the blocker 47 is turned on, the D6 bit is “1”, and when the hopper motor 36 is turned on, the D7 bit is set to “1”. More specifically, the address “F023” is updated in the main process, the data of the output port 3 is generated based on the data of the address “F023” in the interrupt process, and the blocker 47 is controlled.

  In FIG. 15, “_PT_MEDAL_LED” of the address “F025” is a storage area of inserted sheet number display LED data, and 3 to 1 sheet insertion display LEDs 73g to 73e are assigned to the D5 to D7 bits, respectively. For example, when only the D7 bit is “1”, control is performed so that only the single-load display LED 73e is lit. Further, when the D7 and D6 bits are “1”, the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f are controlled to be lit.

“_PT_MEDAL_IO” of the address “F027” is a storage area for medal signal data, and a medal payout signal is assigned to the D5 bit and a medal insertion (bet) signal is assigned to the D6 bit. The bit allocation is set to be the same as the allocation bits of the medal payout signal and the medal insertion (bet) signal of the output port 6 (FIG. 7). The medal payout signal is turned on when the medal payout signal is output (transmitted) to the outside. Similarly, the medal insertion signal is turned on when a medal insertion (bet) signal is output to the outside.
In the present embodiment, the medal insertion signal is for transmitting bet medal number data (how many bets have been placed and the game has started) to the outside, and does not include the stored number data.

In FIG. 16, “_TM1_OUT_CNT” (external signal output time) of the address “F02A” is a timer value storage area for measuring the output time of the medal insertion signal and medal payout signal. In this embodiment, when it is determined that the timer value has become “0”, the timer value is set to “46” again, and the count for subtracting “1” for each interrupt is continued.
“_TM1_MDL_SENS” of the address “F02F” is a storage area of a timer value for detecting an abnormal input of the input sensors 48a and 48b. In this embodiment, when the blocker 47 is turned off, “224” is set as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. As will be described in detail later, when this value is “0”, an error occurs when the insertion sensors 48a and 48b detect medals.

  “_TM1_CH_CHK” of the address “F031” is a storage area for a timer value for detecting abnormal passage of the passage sensor 46. In this embodiment, a value of “200” is set when abnormality detection of the passage sensor 46 is started, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Even when “0” is obtained, an error is detected when the passage sensor 46 detects a medal.

“_TM1_BLOFF_CHK” of the address “F032” is a storage area of a timer value for monitoring the time for preventing the medal from being caught between the medal selector 45 and the blocker 47. When the rising data of the passage sensor 46 is detected, “45” is set as an initial value, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Until this value becomes “0”, the blocker 47 is not turned on from off.
“_TM1_POWER_ON” of the address “F033” is a storage area of a timer value for counting the time for outputting the external signal 4 (D1 bit of the output port 6) at the time of power failure recovery. In the present embodiment, when a return from power-off is detected, “136” is set as the initial value of this value, and “1” is subtracted for each interrupt. Then, it is determined that the external signal 4 is output until this value becomes “0”.

  “_FL_WIN” of the address “F040” is a symbol combination display flag storage area, and in this embodiment, replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D1 bit. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol has stopped, the D0 bit is set to “1”. This bit is changed from “1” to “0” when the next game starts (when the start switch 41 is operated).

In FIG. 17, “_NB_REP_MEDAL” of the address “F06C” is a storage area of automatic insertion number data (data indicating the number of medals automatically bet upon replay winning), and “3” is stored in this embodiment.
“_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06D” is a storage area for medal bet number data, and in this embodiment, any one of “0” to “3” is stored.
“_NB_PAY_MEDAL” of the address “F06E” is a storage area of medal payout number data, and in the present embodiment, any value from “0” to “8” is stored. In the present embodiment, since the maximum payout number of medals in one game is 8, the maximum value of the medal payout number data is “8”. However, for example, when a 15-sheet payout combination is provided, the medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

  “_CT_MEDAL_IN” of the address “F06F” is a data storage area of the number of medal insertion (bet) signal outputs, and values “0” to “6” are stored. In the present embodiment, the medal insertion signal output count indicates the number of times that the bet number of medals is output as a signal, and the number of times that the bet number is doubled is output. Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the bet number is “3”, and therefore the maximum value of the medal insertion signal output number is “6”.

  “_CT_MEDAL_OUT” of the address “F070” is a data storage area of the medal payout signal output count, and values “0” to “16” are stored. This medal payout signal output count indicates the number of times that the medal payout number is output to the outside as a signal, and outputs the number of times the payout number is doubled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of payouts is “8”, so the maximum value of the medal payout signal output count is “16”. As described above, when the maximum value of the number of payouts is set to “15”, for example, the maximum value of the medal payout signal output count is “30”.

  “_FL_INF_OUT” of the address “F0E2” is a storage area of the external signal output flag, and is data in which the corresponding bit is “1” when the external signals 1 to 3 are output. These external signals 1 to 3 are the same as the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 6 (FIG. 7), and the bit assignment of these external signals 1 to 3 is the same as that of the external signals 1 to 3 of the output port 6. It is set to match the bit assignment.

Next, the medal signal (medal insertion signal and medal payout signal) will be described.
FIG. 18A is a time chart for explaining the transmission state of the medal signal. As shown in FIG. 18A, in this embodiment, the medal insertion or payout signal is transmitted once for each medal. For example, when there are three bet medals, the medal insertion signal is switched from on to off to on to off to on to off. Similarly, for example, when the medal payout number is 1, the medal payout signal changes from on to off.

As shown in FIG. 18A, in this embodiment, when the medal signal is transmitted, the count value becomes “0” (or “46” is reset) as the external signal output time described above. Sometimes, the medal signal is turned on, and the medal signal is kept on until the count value becomes “0” again (that is, after the medal signal is turned on, until 46 interrupts are counted). When the count value becomes “0” (the number of interruptions is counted as “46”), the medal signal is turned off, and until the count value becomes “0” again, that is, after the medal signal is turned off, 46 interrupts occur. The medal signal is kept off until the count is counted.
In this embodiment, since one interrupt time is 2.235 ms, when 46 interrupts are converted into time, it is 102.81 (ms) (about 100 ms).
The medal signal output (on / off) as described above is repeated for the number of medals.

  FIG. 18B is a diagram showing the relationship between the medal payout signal (D5 bit of medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO)) and the medal payout signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_OUT). When the medal payout signal is “1”, it corresponds to an ON signal in FIG. 18A, and when it is “0”, it corresponds to an OFF signal in FIG. The medal payout signal output count indicates the number of times the medal payout signal is turned on or off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the actual medal payout number is doubled.

FIG. 18B shows an example in which the medal payout signal is “0” at the beginning (before update) (the left end side in the figure). When three medals are paid out, the medal payout signal output count is updated to “6”.
The C register value is
When the value of the medal payout signal output count is larger than “0”: 0010000 (D5 bit is “1”)
When the value of the medal payout signal output count is “0”: 00000000 (D5 bit is “0”)
Set to
Specifically, when it is determined in step S966 of FIG. 72 that will be described later that the medal payout signal output count is greater than “0”, the D5 bit of the C register is set to “1” in step S968.

Accordingly, when the medal payout signal output count is updated to “6” as in the above example, the D5 bit of the C register value becomes “1”.
Next, an XOR operation is performed on the pre-update medal payout signal and the D5 bit value of the C register, and this value is used as the post-update medal payout signal. In this example, the pre-update medal payout signal is “0” and the D5 bit of the C register value is “1”, so the post-update medal payout signal is “1”. When the updated medal payout signal is “1”, the signal is turned on as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 18B and is continued for about 100 ms.

  In the next update, the pre-update medal payout signal is “1” unlike the previous update. Further, since the medal payout signal output is executed once, the medal payout signal output frequency is updated to “5” by subtracting “1” from “6”. Therefore, the D5 bit of the C register value is “1”, and the updated medal payout signal is “0”. As a result, the medal payout signal is turned off for the next approximately 100 ms.

As described above, when calculation is performed every about 100 ms, when the medal payout signal before update is “0”, the medal payout signal after update is “1”, and the medal payout signal before update is “1”. ", The updated medal payout signal is" 0 ". Accordingly, until the output of the medal payout signal is completed, the updated medal payout signal repeats “0” and “1” and has a waveform as shown in the lower part of FIG.
The medal payout signal output count is “0” at the end. When the medal payout signal output count becomes “0”, the D5 bit value of the C register value also becomes “0”. Therefore, finally, the pre-update medal payout signal, the medal payout signal output count, the D5 bit value of the C register value, and the post-update medal payout signal all become “0” (FIG. 18B).

As described above, in this embodiment, the medal payout signal output count (F070; _CT_MEDAL_OUT) is doubled as the medal payout number data (F06E; _NB_PAY_MEDAL) (the medal insertion number data (F06D; _NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at the time of replay winning). Remember the value.
The same applies to the number of medal insertion signal outputs (F06F; _CT_MEDAL_IN), which will be described later, and a value obtained by doubling the medal insertion number data (F06D; _NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored.
The reason for this setting is to generate data indicating “1” and data indicating “0”. In this way, a correct medal payout (or insertion) signal can be generated by a simple arithmetic process without determining whether or not the previous medal payout (or insertion) signal is “1”. Because.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the relationship between the medal payout signal and the medal payout signal output count as shown in FIG. FIG. 19A shows the time when interrupt is not prohibited, and FIG. 19B shows the time when interrupt is disabled.
As shown in FIG. 19A, when the medal payout signal before update is “1” and the medal payout signal output count is “3”, the updated medal payout signal is “0”. Thereafter, it is assumed that the medal payout signal output count is updated from “3” to “5” before the medal payout signal is updated next time.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, first, in process 1, a value “5” obtained by adding “2” corresponding to one medal to the medal payout signal output count “3” is stored in the A register. Next, before the A register value “5” is updated as the medal payout signal output count, an interrupt process is executed, and the medal payout signal output count is subtracted from “3” to “1”. (Step S967 in FIG. 72 described later). After this interrupt processing, it is assumed that the A register value “5” is updated as the medal payout signal output count (processing 2).

In this case, as shown in FIG. 19A, since the medal payout signal is “0” and the medal payout signal output count is “5”, the D5 bit of the C register value is “1”, and the updated medal payout The signal is “1”.
Accordingly, as described with reference to FIG. 18, when the medal payout signal is continuously output, finally, the medal payout signal output count is “0” and the D5 bit of the C register value is “0”. Nevertheless, the medal payout signal is “1”. Therefore, after this, the medal payout signal remains “1” and does not become “0”.
Such inconvenience may occur when “Yes” is determined in “External signal output time?” In step S961 of FIG. 72 described later (when the processing of steps S962 to S969 is executed).

In order to avoid the inconvenience as described above, in the present embodiment, interrupt prohibition processing is executed before and after updating the medal payout signal output count. An example is shown in FIG.
In the example of FIG. 19B, at the first stage, as in FIG. 19A, the medal payout signal is “1”, the medal payout signal output count is “3”, and the D5 bit of the C register value is “1”. " At this time, when one medal is paid out and an attempt is made to update the number of medal payout signal outputs, interruption is prohibited (process 0).

Next, by processing 1, “5” obtained by adding a double value “2” of “1” corresponding to the payout of one medal to the medal payout signal output count “3” is stored in the A register. Then, the A register value “5” is updated as the medal payout signal output count.
After this update, the interrupt processing that has been prohibited is permitted by processing 3. When the interruption process is executed with this permission, a process of subtracting “1” from the medal payout signal output count “5” (step S967) is executed.

As a result, when the medal payout signal is continuously output, finally, the medal payout signal output count is “0”, the D5 bit of the C register value is “0”, and the medal payout signal is “0”. Become.
As described above, if the interruption process is prohibited before and after the medal payout signal output count is updated and the subtraction process of the medal payout signal output count is prohibited, the medal payout signal can be finally set to “0”.
Note that the interrupt prohibition process described above corresponds to steps S461 to S463 in FIG.

18B and 19 similarly apply to the medal insertion signal (D6 bit of the medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO)) and the medal insertion signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN).
Specifically, for example, in FIG. 18B, for the first time (before update) (the left end side in the figure), three medals are inserted while the medal insertion signal is “0”. The medal insertion signal output count is updated to “6”.
The C register value is
When the value of the medal insertion signal output count is larger than “0”: 01000000 (D6 bit is “1”)
When the value of the medal insertion signal output count is “0”: 00000000 (D6 bit is “0”)
Set to
This process is a process of setting the D6 bit of the C register value to “1” in step S965 when it is determined in step S963 in FIG. 72 described later that the number of medal insertion signal outputs is larger than “0”.

Therefore, when the medal insertion signal output count is updated to “6”, the D6 bit of the C register value becomes “1”.
Next, an XOR operation is performed on the pre-update medal insertion signal and the D6 bit value of the C register, and the value is used as the updated medal insertion signal. In the example of FIG. 18B, since the pre-update medal insertion signal is “0” and the D6 bit of the C register value is “1”, the post-update medal insertion signal is “1”. When the updated medal insertion signal is “1”, it is turned on as shown in FIG. 18A, and this is continued for about 100 ms.

  In the next update, the medal insertion signal before update is “1” unlike the previous update. In addition, since the medal insertion signal output is executed once, the medal insertion signal output count is updated to “5” by subtracting “1” from “6”. Therefore, the D6 bit of the C register value is “1”, and the updated medal insertion signal is “0”. Thus, the medal insertion signal is turned off for the next approximately 100 ms.

As described above, when calculation is performed every about 100 ms, when the medal insertion signal before update is “0”, the medal insertion signal after update is “1”, and the medal insertion signal before update is “1”. ", The updated medal insertion signal is" 0 ". Therefore, until the output of the medal insertion signal is completed, the updated medal insertion signal repeats “0” and “1” and has a waveform as shown in the lower part of FIG.
Further, the medal insertion signal output count is “0” at the end. When the medal insertion signal output count becomes “0”, the D6 bit of the C register value also becomes “0”. Therefore, finally, the pre-update medal insertion signal, the medal insertion signal output count, the D6 bit of the C register value, and the post-update medal insertion signal all become “0”.
As in the case of medal payout, interrupt prohibition processing is executed as shown in FIG. 19B when a medal is inserted. The interrupt prohibition process when a medal is inserted corresponds to steps S442 to S444 in FIG.

20A and 20B are time charts showing the transmission timing of the medal insertion signal and medal payout signal, respectively.
As described above, in the present embodiment, both the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal are turned on during 46 interrupts, and then turned off during 46 interrupts.
The external signal output time is counted for 46 interrupts (102.81ms) when counting is started, and when the count value of the number of interrupts reaches “46”, the value is reset to “0” again. Then, the interrupt count is repeated. Therefore, the timer repeats the interrupt count “46”.

  In FIG. 20A, when three medals are inserted (betted), a medal insertion signal is output from the D6 bit of the output port 6. As described above, the data of the bet number “3” is doubled, the medal insertion signal output count is “6”, and a medal insertion signal corresponding to the number is output. Here, the signal output timing is when the count value of the number of interruptions in the external signal output time becomes “46”. Therefore, after the medal insertion signal transmission preparation is completed, the next time the external signal output time interrupt count value becomes “46” is the transmission start timing.

  Then, the signal continues to be output, and when the count value of the number of interruptions of the external signal output time becomes “46”, it is turned off from on. When the medal insertion signal output count is not “0”, the count value of the interrupt count of the external signal output time is turned “46” when the external signal output time interrupt count is set to “46”. Thus, when the count value of the number of interruptions of the external signal output time becomes “46”, the signal is turned on / off.

  FIG. 20A shows an example in which one winning combination is won when all the reels 31 are stopped. When the payout number is “1”, as described above, the medal payout signal output count is “2”, which is doubled. Then, after the preparation for transmitting the medal payout signal is completed, the next time the count value of the number of interruptions of the external signal output time becomes “46” is the transmission start timing, and the medal payout corresponding to the medal payout signal output frequency A signal is output. The timing at which the output signal turns from on to off and from off to on is the same as the medal insertion signal.

FIG. 20B shows another example of a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal. In the example of FIG. 20B, although not provided in the present embodiment, the relationship between the medal payout signal and the next game when 15 winning combinations (the maximum number payable in one game) wins is shown. .
When all the reels 31 are stopped and 15 winning combinations are won, “30” is set as the medal payout signal output count (the medal payout signal output count immediately before is set to “0”). In the same manner as described above, the transmission of the medal payout signal is started at the timing when the count value of the number of interruptions of the external signal output time becomes “46”. As described above, since one medal payout signal is about 100 ms, the time corresponding to the medal payout signal output count “30” is about 3 seconds. Therefore, before the transmission of all the medal payout signals is completed, the game may proceed until the next game is started and all reels 31 of the next game are stopped.

The example of FIG. 20B shows an example in which three medals are bet when the remaining number of medal payout signal outputs is “13”. When three medals are bet, “6” is set as the number of medal insertion signal outputs, and the medal insertion signal is output from the D6 bit. Therefore, when this medal insertion signal is output, the medal payout signal is also output from the D5 bit.
Further, in the present embodiment, since the game can be started even before the output of the medal insertion signal is completed, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated immediately after the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, etc. Even before the completion of outputting the medal insertion signal, the rotation of the reel 31 is started and the game is started.

Then, when all the reels 31 are stopped, the example of FIG. 20B shows a state where the output of the payout signal for 15 winning combinations in the previous game has not yet ended.
Furthermore, in this game, it is assumed that eight winning combinations have won. In this case, the medal payout signal output count “16” corresponding to 8 payouts is added to the medal payout signal output count. In this example, when the remaining medal payout signal output count is “2”, 8 payout signals are received, and the medal payout signal output count (remaining) is updated to “1 + 16 = 17”.

FIG. 21 is a time chart showing the external signals 1 to 3 output from the D2 to D4 bits of the output port 6. There are various output timings of the external signal indicating that the ART is activated, the ART is continued, and the ART is being performed. In the present embodiment, the following control is performed.
In this embodiment, a push order correct answer counter and a push order incorrect answer counter are provided.
The push order correct answer counter counts the number of times that the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order in the case of a bell win described later. Further, the counter is not added unless the correct answers are made.

  For example, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order when the first bell is won, the pressing correct answer counter becomes “+1”. Next, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order at the time of the second bell winning, the pressing correct answer counter becomes “+2”. However, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order during the second bell win, the count value of the correct pressing order counter is cleared to “0”. In this way, “+1” is added every time the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct answer pressing order when the bell is won, but it is cleared to “0” when the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of the bell winning. Is done.

  The push order correct answer counter counts the number of times the stop switch 42 is operated in the wrong answer push order when the bell is won. Further, the counter is not added unless the incorrect answer is continuously made. For example, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of the first bell winning, the pressing order incorrect answer counter becomes “+1”. Next, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order at the time of the second winning of the bell, the pressing order incorrect answer counter becomes “+2”. However, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the correct push order in the second bell win, it is cleared to “0”.

Thus, during an ART game, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the incorrect answer pressing order when the bell is won due to a player's operation error, the value of the pressing order incorrect answer counter is “ It will not be “+2”.
Furthermore, in a non-ART game, when a bell is won, the correct answer is pushed in three consecutive times, and the push order correct answer counter becomes “+3” very rarely.

Further, in the present embodiment, a game number counter for counting the number of games during ART is provided. The game number counter is cleared to “1” at the same time when the push order correct answer counter becomes “+1”, and cleared to “0” at the same time when the push order correct answer counter is cleared to “0” without becoming “+3”. Is done.
When the push order correct answer counter reaches “+3”, thereafter, the count value is incremented by “+1” for each game regardless of the push order correct answer / incorrect answer at the time of winning the bell.

When ART is started, the correct answer push order is notified on the sub-control board 80 side. The main control board 60 outputs the external signals 1 and 3 when the push order correct answer counter becomes “+3”.
In the example of FIG. 21, one set of ART consists of 50 games, and a plurality of sets are set to be able to be continued by winning or the like. In the present embodiment, when the game number counter reaches “50”, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the push order correct answer counter becomes “+1” at the next bell winning. When it is determined that the value is “+1”, the output of the external signal 1 is terminated. Further, when the push order incorrect answer counter becomes “+2” after the game number counter becomes “50”, the output of the external signals 1 and 3 is terminated.

On the other hand, when the push order correct answer counter reaches “+3”, the external signal 2 indicating the ART continuation starts to be output after a lapse of T1 time (for example, 1500 ms). Then, after the game number counter reaches “50”, the output continues until the push order correct answer counter reaches “+1” or the push order incorrect answer counter reaches “+2”.
The example of FIG. 21 shows an example in which three sets of ART are continued. In such a case, after the game number counter becomes “50”, when the push order correct answer counter becomes “+1”, the external signal 2 is turned off from that point, and T2 time (for example, 1000 ms) has elapsed. The output of the external signal 2 is resumed later.

As described above, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the external signals 1 to 3 (ART signal) are output from the D2 to D4 bits of the output port 6, and the medal insertion or payout signal is output from the D5 to D6 bits. Is output.
In the above example, the number of times the correct answer was pressed when the bell was won was counted, and an external signal related to ART was transmitted based on the count value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as will be described later, the RT state is shifted (shifted to RT2) when the ART state is shifted to, so that an ART signal may be transmitted when the RT state is reached.
As shown in the output port 6 (FIG. 7), the external signal 5 is output from the D0 bit and the external signal 4 is output from the D1 bit. The output of these signals will be described later.

Next, a specific configuration of the main control board 60 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 5, the main CPU 62 of the main control board 60 includes the following setting changing means 62a and the like. Note that the following means in the present embodiment are examples, and are not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The setting changing means 62a is a means for changing / determining a setting value.
Here, the set value defines the degree of player's advantage, more specifically, the expected value of the payout number with respect to the number of inserted medals (medals that can be acquired by the player), and is set in this embodiment. 1 to setting 6 stages are provided.
The higher the set value, the higher the advantage for the player, such as the higher the winning probability of at least some of the combinations.
Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the probability of shifting to ART, and the higher the advantage for the player is set.

  In addition, it is not restricted only to making the probability which transfers to ART high, For example, the probability of adding up the game frequency in AT and the number of payouts may be made high, and the probability of continuing ART may be made high.

In order to set / change the set value, a power switch 51, a setting key switch 52, and a setting change / reset switch 53 are used.
In the present embodiment, when the power switch 51 is turned off and the power is turned off, a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, so that the setting key switch 52 is turned on. When the power switch 51 is turned on again in this state, the setting is being changed, that is, the setting changing mode is entered. In this case, normal startup processing is not performed. Therefore, in order to change the setting, the power switch 51 needs to be turned on / off.

In the setting change mode, the setting changing means 62a displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 63.
The setting change means 62a displays the setting value each time the setting change / reset switch 53 is operated (turned on): .fwdarw. "1" .fwdarw. "2" .fwdarw. "3" .fwdarw. "4" “→” 5 ”→“ 6 ”→“ 1 ”→“ 2 ”→...

Further, when the start switch 41 is turned on, the setting changing means 62a determines the setting value with the numerical value displayed on the setting value display LED 63 at this time, and “0” indicating that the setting value has been determined. Is displayed on the set value display LED 63.
Then, the setting change means 62a rotates the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, thereby storing the determined setting value in a predetermined storage area in the RWM 61, and after the setting change It becomes possible to play with the set value.

In the present embodiment, the determination of the setting key switch 52 being turned off is performed based on the falling data of the setting key switch 52. However, the setting key switch 52 is turned on / off. You may comprise so that it may be performed based on.
Further, it may be configured so that the game cannot be performed with the setting value after the setting change unless the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot.
Further, if the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise to turn off the setting key switch 52, the setting key is removed from the setting key insertion slot, and the power switch 51 is once turned off in this state and then not turned on again. You may comprise so that a game cannot be performed with the setting value after a setting change.

In addition, in the state where no medals are bet and the part lottery is not performed (before the start switch 41 is operated), the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot, and the setting key switch 52 is turned on. And “Settings are being confirmed”. That is, when only the set value is confirmed, it is not necessary to turn on / off the power switch 51. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting display LED 63 as in the case of the setting change.
Furthermore, when the power switch 51 is turned on while the setting key switch 52 is turned on, reset, that is, initialization processing is performed. This initialization process will be described later.

The role lottery means 62b performs lottery for each game at the start of the game.
Here, the combination of the present embodiment, the combination of symbols, and the like will be described.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 22, symbol numbers are also shown. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 16 is “bell”.

As shown in FIG. 22, in this embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 16 frames (symbols), and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame. Depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10, it may be 20 frames or 21 frames.
FIG. 23 is a view showing the display window 13 (transparent window) provided on the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10, the positional relationship between the reels 31, and the effective lines.

  In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the horizontal direction in this embodiment. Further, each reel 31 is arranged so that three symbols that are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 13. Therefore, the display windows 13 of the slot machine 10 are arranged so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. The numbers on the lower right of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

  In this specification, in FIG. 6, “watermelon (01)” on the left reel 31, “replay (16)” on the middle reel 31, and “blue 7 (14)” on the right reel 31. Is called “upper stage”, and the “reel (number 13)” on the left reel 31, the “bell (number 15)” on the middle reel 31, and the “replay (number 13)” on the right reel 31 are The position where the symbol is stopped is called “middle stage”, “replay (15th)” of the left reel 31, “white 7 (14th)” of the middle reel 31, and “bell (12th)” of the right reel 31. The position where the symbol "" is stopped is referred to as "lower stage".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 23, effective lines are set for nine symbols visible from the display window 13.
Here, the “effective line” is a symbol combination line that forms a symbol combination when the reel 31 is stopped, and a symbol combination corresponding to any of the combinations is the line. It is a line that will be the winning prize of that role when stopped. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, only the effective line (one line) in the middle in the horizontal direction is defined, and all the other symbol combination lines are invalid lines.

  For example, in FIG. 23, a symbol combination line passing through the upper stage of each reel 31 and a symbol combination line passing through the lower stage of the left reel 31, the middle stage of the middle reel 31, and the upper stage of the right reel 31 are also conceivable. This line is an invalid line in this embodiment. An invalid line is a line that is not set as a valid line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on that line, a profit corresponding to the combination is given. This line does not perform (medal payout etc.). In other words, the invalid line is a line that is not a target of combination of symbols in the first place.

  Conventionally, there are known slot machines in which the number of effective lines differs depending on the number of medals bet. For example, when the number of medal bets is one, one effective line is set, when the number of medal bets is two, the number of effective lines is three, and when the number of medal bets is three, the number of effective lines is set to five. And so on. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during a game, three or two medals are bet and a game is played, and in all games, only one in the horizontal middle stage is always an effective line. The effective line may be determined in advance according to the number of medals bet.

24 to 26 are diagrams showing combinations of types of combinations, the number of payouts, and symbols in the present embodiment. In FIG. 24 to FIG. 26, the number of medals displayed in parentheses in the “Position” column indicates the number of payouts when winning the winning combination.
Further, for example, in the case of the bell 02a of FIG. 24, the combinations of the symbols of the bell 02a are 2 of "Replay"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" and "Replay"-"Red 7"-"BAR". It means that it has a kind (in the case of having a combination of a plurality of symbols in other roles, it has the same meaning).

The roles of this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays, and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations stops on the active line (the combination wins, the same applies hereinafter), the number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.

  In addition, in the “Rules for Game Machine Approval and Type Approval”, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is stopped on the active line, a game to be performed without giving a medal or the like is given. It is interpreted that it is not “winning (displaying a combination of symbols for obtaining medals etc.)”. However, in the present application (this specification, etc.), replay is also treated as one of the roles (replaying role) and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay is stopped on the active line is referred to as “replay winning”. .

First, the special role is a role that shifts from a normal game to a special game. In the present embodiment, 1BB (first type big bonus) is provided as a special combination.
Other special roles include RB (regular bonus), SB (single bonus), and MB (middle bonus, also referred to as second type big bonus (2BB)), but are provided in this embodiment. Not.

When 1BB wins, medals are not paid out in the game, but the game shifts from the next game to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game.
Note that the 1BB game is an advantageous game for the player who can expect to win more medals than the normal game because the turnout rate is set to exceed “1”.

In addition, the replay (re-playing combination) is a combination that enables a re-play that maintains the number of medals inserted in the game (automatic bets on medals).
The replay of this embodiment includes a replay corresponding to a normal replay and two types of special replays (special replays 1 and 2), each having a different combination of symbols.
The special replay 1 is a role that promotes the gaming state from RT1 to RT2 when winning in RT1, and is also referred to as promotion replay.
On the other hand, special replay 2 is a role of demoting the gaming state from RT2 to RT1 when winning at RT2, and is also referred to as falling replay.

Furthermore, a small role is roughly divided into a bell and a cherry.
The bell includes a bell 01 with eight payouts at the time of winning a prize and bells 02a to 09d with one payout at the time of winning a prize.
Cherry has four types of cherries 01 to 04, and the payout number at the time of winning is set to one for each.

In each of the above-described combinations, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the combination does not stop on the active line in the game won for the combination, a combination that is carried over to the next game and a combination that is not carried over are determined.
The combination carried over is 1BB, which is a special combination. When 1BB is won, the game is controlled to carry over the winning of 1BB to the next game in the game until 1BB wins.

  On the other hand, the winning combination of 1BB is carried over, while small plays and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of a combination, when a small combination or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only in the game, and the winning combination is not carried over to the next game. That is, in the game won for these winning combinations, the reel 31 is controlled to stop so that a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination can be won. , The right (that is, information) related to the winning role will disappear.

  A game in which the special role (1BB) is not won (during a game in which the special role is not carried over) is referred to as “non-inside”. A game in which a special role is won in a game before the game but the selected special role is not won (a game in which the special role is carried over) is called “inside”.

Returning to FIG.
The role lottery means 62b includes, for example, a random number generator for role lottery (a hardware random number, a random number generator provided in the MPU, etc.), a random number extractor that extracts a random number generated by the random number generator, And determining means for determining the presence / absence of a winning combination and the winning combination based on the random value extracted by the random number extracting means.

  The random number generation means generates random numbers in a predetermined area (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation). Random numbers are MPUs for random numbers (hardware random numbers) in which a counter that performs 1 count at 200n (nano) sec continues counting as a cycle in the range of 0 to 65535 or a predetermined random numerical order (number sequence). Is a random number (built-in random number) that is updated every clock cycle, and continues to count the random number while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The judging means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extracting means with the role lottery table, thereby determining the combination corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, if the extracted random number value belongs to the 1BB winning area, it is determined to be 1BB winning, and if it belongs to the non-winning area, it is determined to be non-winning.
The extracted random number may be processed by calculation and collated with the role lottery table.

  The combination lottery table defines the types of combinations to be selected and the winning probability of each combination. The role lottery table is provided for each gaming state, and each has a predetermined range of lottery areas.This lottery area is divided into a winning area and a non-winning area for each role, and It is set to a predetermined ratio so as to have a winning probability set in advance.

FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 are diagrams showing the types of winning in this embodiment. Winnings in the present embodiment have winning numbers “0” to “16”. When the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means 62b, one of the winning numbers “0” to “16” or no winning is made.
The winning of 1BB with the winning number “0” and the winning of the replay with the winning number “2” are independent winnings of 1BB and replay, respectively.

On the other hand, the winning numbers “3” to “16” are duplicate winnings of a plurality of types of roles.
Winning numbers “2” to “13” indicate bell winnings, and all are duplicate winnings of eight types of bells 01 and three types of bells of one type (four types in total). For example, Bell A1 means that four bells, Bell 01, Bell 02a, Bell 03, and Bell 04a are duplicated.
In addition, the cherry duplication with the winning number “14” is a win in which four cherries 01 to 04 are duplicated.

Furthermore, the replay overlapping winning 1 with the winning number “15” is the overlapping winning of special replay 1 and special replay 2, and the replay overlapping winning 2 with the winning number “16” is special replay 1, special replay 2, and replay. It is a duplicate winning.
27 and 28 show the relationship between the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the winning combination in the “Remarks” column, which will be described later.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing the winning probabilities for the gaming states of the winning numbers “0” to “16” described above. In other words, FIG. 29 shows a role lottery table for each gaming state.
In FIG. 29, “numerical value” is a value indicating a winning range out of the entire range “65536” taken by the random number value. Therefore, “winning probability = numerical value / 65536”. For example, in the gaming state such as RT1, the number of 1BB is “218”, so the winning probability of 1BB is “218/65536” = “about 1/300”.
Note that 1BB is set to be different depending on the above-described setting value, and the example of FIG. 29 shows a numerical value in any one setting value.

Further, the “game state” of the present embodiment includes a normal game and a 1BB game (special game). The normal game has a 1BB non-internal game and an internal game. The winning probability of replay in the internal game is 8978/65536 (about 1 / 7.3).
Further, the non-internal game has RT1 and RT2. In RT1, the combined probability of the winning number “1” and the winning numbers “15” and “16” is “about 1 / 7.3”, which is almost the same as the winning probability of the replay in the internal game. .

Here, RT1 is an RT (also referred to as non-RT) state in which the winning probability of replay is set to a normal probability. Note that RT1 is a so-called “ordinary (non-ART and non-inside)” gaming state.
RT2 is an RT in which the winning probability of replay is set to a high probability. In RT2, the winning combination is set to have almost no winning (1/65536).
In addition, when the winning probability of replay in an internal game is set higher than normal (RT1 or the like), it may be referred to as internal RT.

In this embodiment, RT1 is non-ART and RT2 is ART.
Therefore, in a non-internal middle game, there is a time when it is non-ART and when it is an ART, but in an internal middle game, it is always non-ART.
A combination lottery table is provided for each of these gaming states, and as shown in FIG. 29, the type of winning combination and the winning probability are set.

In a non-internal game, 1BB is drawn. And when 1BB is won, it transfers to a game in the inside from the next game. When the game moves to the inside game, 1BB is not drawn.
In a game state other than the 1BB game, in the internal middle game, only the winning number “1” is drawn for replay. In contrast, RT1 and RT2 that are not inside have winning numbers “1”, “15”, and “16” as winnings for replay.

Moreover, as a kind of bell winning, it has bell A1-A8 and B1-B4. As will be described in detail later, when the bells A1 to A8 are elected, the irregular push (middle or right first stop) is the bell win order in which the correct answer is pushed. One stop) is the bell winning order in which the correct answer is pushed.
In addition, the Bell A1 to A8 winnings are all assigned “1260” as a numerical value, but the Bells B1 to B4 winning are all assigned “1620” as a numerical value. Winning probability is higher than A8 winning.

  Further, in the 1BB game, it is set to win the bell B1 among the bell wins. Furthermore, in the 1BB game of this embodiment, replay lottery is not performed, but it is of course possible to perform replay lottery.

  In FIG. 5, the main CPU 62 controls on / off of a winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means 62b. In this embodiment, a winning flag (a part of the storage area of the RWM 61) is provided for each combination for each combination. When any of the winning combinations is won by the winning lottery means 62b, the winning flag for the winning combination corresponding to the winning is turned on (the winning flag is set).

  For example, in a non-inside game, when the bell A1 is won, the winning flags relating to the bells 01, 02a, 03, 04a (four in total) are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, winnings for small roles other than special roles and replays are not carried over, so even if a small role or replay is won in the game and the winning flag for these roles is turned on, At the end, the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, 1BB wins are carried over, so when 1BB is won in the game, and the winning flag related to 1BB won is turned on, the ON state is maintained until the 1BB wins, Turned off when 1BB wins.

For example, if 1BB is won by the winning lottery means 62b and 1BB is not won in the game, and if the next game (internal game) wins the bell A1, 1BB won in the previous game and the game The winning flags of the winning bells 01, 02a, 03, 04a (a total of five) are turned on. And when 1BB is not won in this game, the ON state of the 1BB winning flag is maintained. On the other hand, regardless of the game result (winning / non-winning) in the game, the four winning flags related to the bell A1 are turned off at the end of the game.
The “game result” in the present embodiment refers to the stop display result of the reel 31 corresponding to the winning combination won by the winning lottery means 62b.

  In FIG. 5, the reel control means 62c starts to rotate all (three) reels 31 when a rotation start command for the reels 31 is received, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. To control. Further, the reel control means 62c selects a stop position determination table corresponding to ON / OFF of the winning flag with reference to ON / OFF of the winning flag in the game after the winning lottery is performed by the winning lottery means 62b. In addition, when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined and the motor 32 is driven and controlled based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated. Thus, the reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is turned on, the reel control means 62c selects a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination (the combination with the winning flag turned on) within the range of stop control of the reel 31. The reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as to be able to stop on the active line, and the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the winning combination (the combination whose winning flag is off) on the effective line. .

Here, “within the range of stop control of the reel 31” means the time from the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (the number of moving frames (symbols)). Means within range.
In this embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 rotations per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thus, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames from the design at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to 3 frames.

  At the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line, when the stop switch 42 is operated In addition, the design is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated at the time of winning the winning combination, when the symbol related to the winning winning combination does not stop at a predetermined effective line, the reel 31 is stopped before stopping. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the symbol related to the winning combination is controlled so as to be stopped on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel 31 is stopped. By controlling the rotational movement of the reel 31 within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is controlled so as not to stop on the effective line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations are won, the priority order of winning combinations is determined in advance, and the drawing priority control of the highest priority symbol is performed according to the predetermined priority order.

Further, the reel control means 62c detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 has been operated is input to the reel control means 62c. By discriminating this signal, it is detected which stop switch 42 has been operated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, during non-ART (except for during ART preparation described later), the stop switch 42 to be operated first (first stop) is determined to be left (forward push) (first left) Stop instruction). Here, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle or right first stop (irregular pressing), for example, it is a condition for setting a penalty period for a predetermined number of games. That is, even if the irregular push is performed, the penalty period is not necessarily set. For example, a penalty period is set when one of the bells is won and the correct answer is reached in the pushing order, and eight coins are paid out. However, in order to suppress irregular pressing, a warning notification is given by sound, image, lamp, etc. that the order of penalty is pressed regardless of the winning combination.

Thus, the player always digests the game as the first left stop except when the irregular push (first stop is middle or right) is notified.
In addition, when the push order notification is performed during ART, when the notification content is middle or right first stop, no penalty is set.
There are various penalties to be set when the irregular key is pressed. In this embodiment, during the penalty period, the ART lottery is executed with a probability that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a probability that is further disadvantageous than the low probability described later). And the notification of the winning combination is not performed.

  The stop position determination table is provided for each on / off state of the winning flag, that is, for each lottery result of the combination by the combination lottery means 62b. The stop position determination table corresponds to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. In each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the number 01 symbol ("watermelon" for the left reel 31) passes through the middle stage (effective line), only the number of symbols is displayed. The stop position is determined in advance such that the number of symbols is stopped in the middle stage by movement control.

The stop position determination table includes the following.
The 1BB table is used when only the 1BB winning flag 66a is on, that is, when 1BB is won in the game, or when 1BB is won before the game and is not won in the game. Within the range of 31 stop control, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped on the effective line, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the role other than 1BB is not stopped on the effective line, and the design when the reel 31 is stopped is stopped. Are defined.

  In the present embodiment, the symbols related to 1BB are “BAR” symbols for all the reels 31. One “BAR” symbol is provided for each reel 31. Therefore, even if the stop switch 42 is operated at an arbitrary position, the “BAR” symbol is not always drawn into the active line, and the stop switch 42 is operated so that the “BAR” symbol stops at the active line. That is necessary.

Here, as described above, if the stop switch 42 is not operated at an appropriate position of the reel 31 (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped within the range of the maximum number of moving frames), the target symbol is stopped on the effective line. The fact that it is not possible to draw (draw to the effective line) is referred to as “PB (pull-in rate) ≠ 1”.
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), the target symbol can always be stopped (drawn) on the effective line. , Referred to as “PB = 1”.

“PB = 1” has a case in which all the reels 31 are in such a role and a case in which only a specific (partial) reel 31 is in that role.
As described above, in the first embodiment, the maximum number of moving frames is “3”. Therefore, when the target symbols are arranged at intervals of 4 symbols or less, “PB = 1” is obtained. When arranged at intervals, “PB ≠ 1”.

The replay table is used when the replay is won (single), and within the range of the reel 31 stop control, the replay is won and no role other than replay is won. This is a combination of symbols.
Here, as shown in FIG. 22, in all the reels 31, “replay” symbols are arranged at intervals of 4 symbols or less. Therefore, the replay can always be won regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (PB = 1).
In both the non-internal game and the internal game, when the replay is won, the replay wins with “PB = 1”.

  The replay duplication 1 table is used when the replay duplication 1 with the winning number “15” is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the special replay is performed when the stop switch 42 is pressed in the middle first stop. 1 is awarded and the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the special replay 2 is awarded when the left or right first stop is made.

  More specifically, in the game using the replay overlap 1 table, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the “bell” symbol is stopped at the middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped. It does not matter whether the next second stop is left or right. When the left reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” symbol is stopped at the middle stage, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” symbol is stopped at the middle stage.

On the other hand, in the case of the left first stop, the “bell” symbol is stopped in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the “replay” symbol is stopped in the middle when the middle reel 31 is stopped, and the “bell” symbol is stopped in the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped.
Similarly, when the right stop is performed, the “bell” symbol is stopped at the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the “bell” symbol is stopped in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped, and the “replay” symbol is stopped in the middle when the middle reel 31 is stopped.

The replay duplication winning 2 table is used when replay duplication 2 with the winning number “16” is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop switch 42 is pressed in the right first stop. Is a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the special replay 1 is won and the special replay 2 is awarded when the left or middle first stop is made.
The stop control of the reel 31 is the same as in the replay overlap 1 table. When the first right stop, “replay”-“bell”-“replay” (special replay 1) is stopped on the active line and left or If it is the middle first stop, “bell”-“replay”-“bell” (special replay 2) is stopped at the active line.

  The bell A1 table is used when the winning of the bell A1 is made (when the winning flags 66a of the bells 01, 02a, 03, 04a are turned on), and the pressing order of the stop switch 42 within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. And, according to the operation timing, the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that the winning bell is won (becomes possible).

Here, as a method of stopping and controlling the reels 31 when a plurality of winning combinations are simultaneously won (duplicate winning), “number priority” and “number priority” can be mentioned.
“Number priority” means that among the symbol combinations related to the winning combination, the symbol constituting the symbol combination with the largest number of payouts is given priority and stopped (drawn) on the active line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.
On the other hand, “number priority” determines the stop position of the reel 31 so that when the reel 31 is stopped, when the symbol is stopped on the effective line, the number of combinations of symbols that can be won is maximized. ing.

In the present embodiment, when the bell A1 is won, the winning combination of eight bells 01 and one bell 02a, 03, 04a is duplicated.
It is the same that when winning other bells, the winning combination of the bell 01 with 8 sheets and the three types of bells with 1 sheet is the same.

  In the present embodiment, when any of the bells is won, stop control based on the number priority is performed when the pressing order of the stop switch 42 is the correct answer pressing order, and when the pressing order is the incorrect answer pressing order, the number is selected. Stop control based on priority.

Hereinafter, stop control will be described by taking the case of winning the bell A1 as an example.
27 and 28, the correct answer pressing order is displayed in parentheses in the “name” column. Further, the “Remarks” column shows the relationship between the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the winning combination.
For example, in the bell A1, in “Remarks”, “213” indicates the middle left / right push order, and “231” indicates the middle right / left push order (“1” = left, “2” = middle, “3” = right).
"1--" means left first stop (the pressing order of the second and third stops is arbitrary), and "3--" means right first stop (second and third stops). Means the order of pressing is arbitrary).
Further, “231: 1 sheet (bell 03)” means that in the order of “231”, that is, in the middle right-left incorrect answering order, “PB = 1”, the bell 03 as a single player wins a prize.
Other contents described in the “Remarks” column are interpreted in the same manner as described above.

The correct answer pressing order when winning the bell A1 is middle left and right. Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the middle / left / right pushing order, the bell 01 wins and eight payouts are made. Here, the symbol combination of the bell 01 is “bell”-“bell”-“replay”, but the “replay” of the right reel 31 is an array of “PB = 1” as described above.
Further, as shown in FIG. 22, all the reels 31 have the “bell” symbol in an arrangement of “PB = 1”. Therefore, when the bell switch A1 is selected and the stop switch 42 is operated with the right and left in the correct answer order, the bell 01 “bell”-“bell”-“replay” stops on the active line.
If the symbols are arranged evenly on the 16-frame reel 31 at intervals of 4 symbols, the symbol “PB = 1” can be set.

On the other hand, when Bell A1 is elected, it is the middle first stop (the correct answer push order at the first stop time), but when it is the second right stop and the wrong answer push order, the stop control is performed as follows. .
At the time of the middle first stop, since the correct answer is pressed at this time, the reel control means 62c stops the “bell” at the middle stage when the middle reel 31 is stopped. At this time, since the correct answer is in the pushing order, the middle reel 31 is stopped with priority on the number of sheets.
Next, since the pressing order is incorrect at the time of the second right stop, the reel control means 62c does not stop “replay” in the middle stage when the right reel 31 stops by performing the number priority control.
Since the “bell” symbol is stopped when the middle reel 31 is stopped, it is necessary to control the combination of symbols whose symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell” to be stopped on the effective line.

Among the winning roles at the time of Bell A1 winning,
"Replay"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" (Bell 02a)
"Replay"-"Red 7"-"BAR" (Bell 02a)
"Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Watermelon" (Bell 03)
"Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Cherry" (Bell 03)
"Cherry"-"Bell"-"Watermelon" (Bell 03)
"Cherry"-"Bell"-"Cherry" (Bell 03)
"Red 7"-"Watermelon"-"Bell" (Bell 04a)
"BAR"-"Watermelon"-"Bell" (Bell 04a)
It is.

Thus, when the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, at that time, “watermelon”-“bell”-“watermelon” or “cherry”-“bell”-“watermelon” It becomes the state which can stop the combination of two types of symbols.
Similarly, when the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “watermelon”-“bell”-“cherry” or “cherry”-“bell”-“cherry” at that time. It becomes the state which can stop the combination of two types of symbols.
On the other hand, when the “replay” symbol is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, the symbol combination that can be won at that time is one type of “bell”-“bell”-“replay” (bell 01). Become.
Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped due to the number priority, the “watermelon” symbol or the “cherry” symbol can be preferentially stopped.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the right reel 31, the “watermelon” symbols are arranged at the 07th and 15th, and the “cherry” symbols are arranged at the 03th and 11th. Accordingly, either “watermelon” or “cherry” symbols are arranged at intervals of four symbols. Therefore, as described above, either the “watermelon” symbol or the “cherry” symbol can be stopped at the active line with “PB = 1”.
In the left and middle reels 31, as in the right reel 31, either the “watermelon” symbol or the “cherry” symbol is arranged at four symbol intervals. For example, in the left reel 31, the “watermelon” symbol or “cherry” symbol is arranged at No. 01, 05, 09, and 13. In the middle reel 31, the “watermelon” symbol or the “cherry” symbol is arranged in the 01st, 05th, 09th, and 13th.

  If the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, at that time, “rotating” − “bell” − “watermelon”. Finally, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol is controlled to stop at the effective line.

Further, when the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, “rotating” − “bell” − “cherry” is obtained at that time. Then, when the left reel 31 is finally stopped, the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol is controlled to stop at the effective line in the same manner as described above.
Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle right and left when the bell A1 is won, the bell 03 can be won with “PB = 1” (probability of 1/1).

Next, when the bell A1 is won and the first left stop is made, the stop control is performed as follows.
At the time of the first stop on the left, the incorrect answer in the pressing order is determined at the time of the first stop. Accordingly, the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number from the first stop.
If you stop “Replay” on the active line at the time of the first stop at the time of the Bell A1 winning, the combination of symbols that can be won at this time is:
"Replay"-"Red 7"-"Red 7"
"Replay"-"Red 7"-"BAR"
(2 types in total).
Also, if you stop “Watermelon” on the active line at the first stop on the left, the combination of symbols that can be awarded at this point is:
"Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Watermelon"
"Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Cherry"
(2 types in total).

Furthermore, at the time of the first stop on the left, if you stop “Cherry” on the active line, the combination of symbols that can be awarded at this point is:
"Cherry"-"Bell"-"Watermelon"
"Cherry"-"Bell"-"Cherry"
(2 types in total).
Furthermore, when “Red 7” is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop on the left, the combination of symbols that can be won at this time is “Red 7”-“Watermelon”-“Bell” (one type) .
Similarly, when “BAR” is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop on the left, the combination of symbols that can be won at this time is “BAR”-“watermelon”-“bell” (one type).

In the above, when there is only one type of symbol combination that can be awarded, it is not a number-priority target. Therefore, there are two types of symbol combinations that can be awarded, “Replay”, “Watermelon”, and “Cherry”.
As described above, when there are a plurality of combinations of symbols having the same number, any of them may be adopted and determined in advance. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the “replay” symbol is stopped at the active line at the time of the first left stop when the bell A1 is won. When the left reel 31 is stopped, the “replay” symbol can be stopped at the active line by “PB = 1”.
Therefore, when the “replay” symbol is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop on the left, it is possible to stop on the active line at that time.
"Replay"-"Red 7"-"Red 7"
"Replay"-"Red 7"-"BAR"
There are two types.

Next, at the time of middle stop, if the “Red 7” symbol can be stopped on the active line, the “Red 7” symbol is stopped, and if “Red 7” cannot be stopped, the other symbols are stopped. .
As shown in FIG. 5, in the middle reel 31, the “red 7” symbol is provided only for the number 02. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the moment (immediately before) No. 15 to No. 16 or No. 01 to No. 02 pass through the active line, the “Red 7” symbol can be stopped on the active line. When the middle stop switch 42 is operated at any other position, the “red 7” symbol cannot be stopped at the active line. For this reason, the probability that the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped is “1/4”.

  Further, at the time of the right stop, the “red 7” or “BAR” symbol is stopped on the active line. In FIG. 5, the “Red 7” symbol is arranged at No. 10 and the “BAR” symbol is arranged at No. 06. Therefore, when the right stop switch 42 is operated at the moment (immediately before) No. 03 to No. 06 or No. 07 to No. 10 pass through the active line, the “Red 7” or “BAR” symbol must be stopped on the active line. Can do. When the right stop switch 42 is operated at a position other than that, the “red 7” or “BAR” symbol cannot be stopped on the active line. For this reason, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the probability that the “red 7” or “BAR” symbol can be stopped on the active line is “½”.

From the above, when Bell A1 is elected and the first left stop, "Replay"-"Red 7"-"Red 7" or "Replay"-"Red 7"-"BAR" is stopped on the active line The probability of being
1/1 (left reel 31) × 1/4 (middle reel 31) × 1/2 (right reel 31)
= 1/8
It becomes.
Therefore, as described in the “Remarks” column, one bell wins with a probability of “1/8”.
It becomes.

Subsequently, when the bell A1 is won, when the first stop is on the right, the stop control is performed as follows.
At the time of the first stop on the right, the wrong answer in the pressing order is determined at the time of the first stop. Accordingly, the reels 31 are controlled to stop with priority on the number from the first stop.
If the “Red 7” symbol is stopped on the active line at the first stop on the right when Bell A1 is selected, the symbol combination that can be won at this point is “Replay”-“Red 7”-“Red 7”. There is one type.

In addition, when the “BAR” symbol is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop on the right, the symbol combination that can be won at this time is “Replay” — “Red 7” — “BAR” (one type) .
Furthermore, when the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the active line at the time of the first stop on the right, the symbol combinations that can be awarded at this point are:
"Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Watermelon"
"Cherry"-"Bell"-"Watermelon"
(2 types).

Furthermore, when the “Cherry” symbol is stopped on the active line at the first stop on the right, the symbol combinations that can be awarded at this point are:
"Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Cherry"
"Cherry"-"Bell"-"Cherry"
(2 types).
Also, if you stop the “bell” symbol on the active line at the first stop on the right, the symbol combinations that can be won at this point are:
"Red 7"-"Watermelon"-"Bell"
"BAR"-"Watermelon"-"Bell"
(2 types).
Therefore, in this embodiment, among the two types, the “bell” symbol is stopped on the active line, and “red 7” — “watermelon” — “bell” or “BAR” — “watermelon” — “bell” "To stop.

At the first stop on the right, “PB = 1” can stop the “bell” symbol on the active line.
At the time of the left stop, if the “red 7” or “BAR” symbol can be stopped on the active line, the “red 7” or “BAR” symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 22, “Red 7” or “BAR” symbols are arranged at No. 06 and No. 14. Therefore, if calculated in the same manner as described above, the “red 7” or “BAR” symbol can be stopped on the active line with a probability of 1/2.
Furthermore, at the time of an intermediate stop, if the “watermelon” symbol can be stopped on the active line, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 22, “Watermelon” symbols are arranged at No. 05 and No. 13. Therefore, the “watermelon” symbol can be stopped at the effective line with a probability of 1/2 as described above.

From the above, when the bell A1 is elected, the probability of being able to stop "Red 7"-"Watermelon"-"Bell" or "BAR"-"Watermelon"-"Bell"
1/2 (left reel 31) x 1/2 (middle reel 31) x 1/1 (right reel 31)
= 1/4
It becomes.
Therefore, it is as described in the “Remarks” column.

As described above, when the bells A1 and A2 are selected, 213 (middle left and right) is in the correct pressing order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, the bell 01 wins with "PB = 1". In the order of pressing 231 (middle right and left), one bell wins with “PB = 1”.
Furthermore, in the pressing order of the left first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/8”.
Furthermore, in the push order of the right first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/4”.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 27, when the bells A3 and A4 are selected, 231 (middle right and left) is in the correct pushing order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order, the bell is “PB = 1”. 01 wins. Further, in the pressing order of 213 (middle left and right), one bell wins with “PB = 1”.
Furthermore, in the pressing order of the left first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/8”.
Furthermore, in the push order of the right first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/4”.

Similarly, when the bells A5 and A6 are selected, 312 (middle right and left) is in the correct pressing order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order, the bell 01 wins with "PB = 1". Further, in the pressing order of 321 (right middle left), one bell wins with “PB = 1”.
Furthermore, in the pressing order of the left first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/8”.
Furthermore, in the pressing order of the middle first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/4”.

As shown in FIG. 28, when the bells A7 and A8 are selected, 321 (right middle left) is in the correct push order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order, the bell 01 wins with "PB = 1". To do. In the order of pressing 312 (middle right and left), one bell wins with “PB = 1”.
Furthermore, in the pressing order of the left first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/8”.
Furthermore, in the pressing order of the middle first stop, one bell wins with a probability of “1/4”.

Next, stop control when the bell B1 is won will be described.
When Bell B1 is won, the correct answer pressing order is 123 (left middle right; forward pressing). Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle left and right, the bell 01 wins and 8 payouts are made. The combination of the symbols of the bell 01 is “bell”-“bell”-“replay”. As described above, the “bell” symbol of the left and middle reels 31 and the “replay” symbol of the right reel 31 are either However, since “PB = 1” is arranged, it can always be stopped at the effective line.
Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the right, middle, and right order in the correct answer pressing order when the bell B1 is selected, the bell 01 “bell”-“bell”-“replay” stops on the active line.

On the other hand, when Bell B1 is elected, the first stop on the left is correct (the correct answer at the time of the first stop).
At the time of the first left stop, since the correct answer is pressed at this time, the reel control means 62c stops the “bell” in the middle when the left reel 31 is stopped. At this time, since the correct answer is the pressing order, the left reel 31 is stopped with priority on the number of sheets.
Next, at the time of the second right stop, since the pressing order is incorrect at this point, the reel control means 62c does not stop the “bell” in the middle when the right reel 31 is stopped by performing the number priority control.

Among the winning roles at the time of winning the Bell B1,
"Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon" (Bell 07)
"Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry" (Bell 07)
"Bell"-"Cherry"-"Watermelon" (Bell 07)
"Bell"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" (Bell 07)
"Replay"-"Replay"-"Bell" (Bell 08)
"Red 7"-"Replay"-"Bell" (Bell 09a)
It is.

Since the symbol of the left reel 31 has already been determined to be the “bell” symbol, the symbol combinations that can be stopped at this time are the symbol combinations (four types) relating to the bell 07. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol is stopped. Whether the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol is stopped, there are two types of symbol combinations that can be stopped at that time (for example, when the “watermelon” symbol is stopped when the right reel 31 is stopped, The combination of symbols that can be stopped is "bell"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" or "bell"-"cherry"-"watermelon").
Here, as shown in FIG. 22, the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbols on the right reel 31 are arranged at intervals of four symbols, that is, “PB = 1”. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, either the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the effective line.

At the time of the middle third stop, the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol is stopped on the active line. As shown in FIG. 22, the symbols “watermelon” or “cherry” of the middle reel 31 are arranged at intervals of four symbols, that is, “PB = 1”. Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped, either the “watermelon” or “cherry” symbol can be stopped on the effective line.
From the above, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing left and right during the selection of Bell B1,
Left reel (1/1) x middle reel (1/1) x right reel (1/1)
= 1/1 (PB = 1)
One bell (Bell 07) can be stopped with the probability of.

Next, when the bell B1 is won, if it is the middle first stop, the stop control is performed as follows.
At the middle first stop, the wrong answer in pushing order is determined at the first stop. Therefore, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by the number priority control from the first stop.
If you stop the “watermelon” on the active line at the time of the first stop during the Bell B1 winning, the combination of symbols that can be awarded at this time,
"Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon"
"Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry"
(2 types).

Also, if you stop “Cherry” on the active line during the middle first stop, the combination of symbols that can be awarded at this point is:
"Bell"-"Cherry"-"Watermelon"
"Bell"-"Cherry"-"Cherry"
(2 types).
Furthermore, when the “replay” is stopped on the active line during the middle first stop, the combination of symbols that can be awarded at this point is:
"Replay"-"Replay"-"Bell"
"Red 7"-"Replay"-"Bell"
(2 types).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of the middle first stop, it is determined that the “replay” symbol is stopped on the active line in the case of two types.

Since the “replay” symbol is “PB = 1” when the middle reel 31 is stopped, it can always be stopped at the active line.
Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped, if the “red 7” symbol can be stopped on the active line, the “red 7” symbol is stopped on the active line. The “red 7” symbol of the left reel 31 has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement. On the other hand, when the “red 7” symbol cannot be stopped, the “replay” symbol is stopped at the active line. Since the “replay” symbol of the left reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement, the “replay” symbol can always be stopped at the active line.

  Furthermore, at the time of a right stop, the “bell” symbol is stopped on the active line. Since the “bell” symbol of the right reel 31 has the “PB = 1” arrangement, the “bell” symbol can always be stopped at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of Bell B1 winning, when it is the middle first stop, the probability that one bell can be stopped on the active line is
1/1 (left reel 31) x 1/1 (middle reel 31) x 1/1 (right reel 31)
= 1/1 (PB = 1)
It becomes.

Next, when the bell B1 is won and the first stop is on the right, stop control is performed as follows.
At the time of the first stop on the right, the wrong answer in the pressing order is determined at the time of the first stop. Therefore, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by the number priority control from the first stop.
If you stop the “Bell” symbol on the active line at the first stop on the right when you win the Bell B1, the combination of symbols that you can win at this point will be:
"Replay"-"Replay"-"Bell"
"Red 7"-"Replay"-"Bell"
(2 types).

In addition, when the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the active line at the first stop on the right, the symbol combinations that can be awarded at this point are:
"Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Watermelon"
"Bell"-"Cherry"-"Watermelon"
(2 types).
Furthermore, when the “Cherry” symbol is stopped on the active line at the first stop on the right, the symbol combinations that can be awarded at this point are:
"Bell"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry"
"Bell"-"Cherry"-"Cherry"
(2 types).

As described above, in the present embodiment, at the time of the first right stop, it is determined that the “bell” symbol is stopped on the active line among the cases where there are two types.
Accordingly, the “bell” symbol on the right reel 31, the “red 7” or “replay” symbol on the left reel 31, and the “replay” symbol on the middle reel 31 are all arranged in a “PB = 1” arrangement on the reel 31. Therefore, these symbols can always be stopped at the active line.
From the above, when Bell B1 is won, the probability of being able to stop one bell on the active line is the first stop on the right.
1/1 (left reel 31) x 1/1 (middle reel 31) x 1/1 (right reel 31)
= 1/1 (PB = 1)
It becomes.

When Bell B2 is won, just like Bell B1 is won, 123 (left middle right) is the correct push order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order, Bell 01 wins with "PB = 1" To do. Also, in the pushing order of 132 (middle left and right), the middle first stop, and the right first stop, each one wins a bell with “PB = 1”.
Similarly, when Bell B3 or B4 is won, 132 (middle left and right) is in the correct pressing order, and when the stop switch 42 is operated in that pressing order, Bell 01 wins with "PB = 1". Also, in the pushing order of 123 (middle left and right), middle first stop, and right first stop, all wins one bell with “PB = 1”.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing the number of places and the expected medal acquisition value for each pressing order when the bells A1 to B4 are won.
As shown in FIG. 30, among Bells A1 to B4 winning, for Bells A1 to A8, the number is set to “1260”, and for Bells B1 to B4, the number is “1620”. "Is set. As a result, the total number of the winning bells is “16560”, and the combined winning probability is “16560/65536” ≈ “1/4”.

Further, in FIG. 30, the expected medal acquisition value for each push order is displayed in each bell win. For example, in the case of Bell A1 winning, if the correct answer is “213”, Bell 01 wins with “PB = 1”, so the expected medal acquisition value is “8”. When the pressing order is “231”, one bell wins with “PB = 1”, so the expected medal acquisition value is “1”.
Furthermore, at the time of the first stop on the left, one winning combination wins with a probability of “1/8”. Therefore, the medal acquisition expected value is “0.125” in any of the pushing orders “123” and “132”.
Furthermore, at the time of the first stop on the right, one winning combination wins with a probability of “1/4”. Therefore, the medal acquisition expected value is “0.25” regardless of the pressing order “312” and “321”.

  In each of the bell pressing orders A1 to A8, the expected medal acquisition value is “8” in the correct answer pressing order (one), and one of the incorrect answer pressing orders (the correct answer in the first stop pressing order). 2) “0.125” and 2 are “0.25”. Therefore, the total is “9.75”. Therefore, when one of the bells A1 to A8 is selected, when one of the push orders is randomly selected (here, the penalty push order is included), the expected medal acquisition value is “1.625 (sheets). ) ”.

  Also, in the case of Bell B1 winning, if the correct answer push order is “123”, Bell 01 wins with “PB = 1”, so the expected medal acquisition value is “8”. Further, in the incorrect answer pressing order, in any incorrect answer pressing order, “PB = 1” wins one bell, so the expected medal acquisition value is “1”. Therefore, the total is “13”. Therefore, when any one of the B1 to B4 wins is selected and one of the pressing orders is randomly selected (including the penalty pressing order), the expected medal acquisition value is “about 2.17 (sheets)”. It becomes.

Next, when any one of the pushing orders is fixed and the pushing order is continued for a long time, the following is obtained. For example, it is assumed that the game is digested in the order of “left middle right” during non-ART by setting the irregular push in the penalty push order. In this case, as shown in FIG. 30, the sum of “number × expected medal acquisition expectation value in the pressing order” is
(1260 × 0.125) × 8 + 1620 × 8 × 2 + 1620 × 1 × 2
= 30420
It becomes.

And as shown in FIG. 30, this value becomes the same value in any pressing order.
Divide this value by "65536"
30420/65536
≒ 0.46 (sheets) (expected medal value based on the winning of bell)
It becomes.
From the above, when the game is digested in the same push order (including the penalty push order), there is no superiority or inferiority by the push order, and the expected medal win value by winning the bell is “0.46 (pieces)” per game. Become.
Furthermore, the expected medal earning value based on the bell win is the same regardless of the push order, so when playing the game with random push order (including penalty push order), the same as above The expected medal acquisition value is the same when the game is digested in the push order (for example, the left middle right push).

Here, a comparison with the prior art will be described.
In the prior art, there is known a slot machine in which the winning ratio of push order bells is assigned so that the correct answer (outgoing rate) at the time of forward pressing is low and the correct answer (outgoing rate) at the time of irregular pressing is high. Specifically, the probability of the correct answer order of the push order bell is set low when the push is forward, and the probability of the correct answer push order of the push order bell is set high when the anomaly is pushed.

  When set in this way, when the game is digested with the pressing order of the stop switch 42 being random, the payout rate becomes a constant value. However, for example, when the game is digested with the push order fixed to the forward push, the turnout rate becomes low, and when the game is digested with the push order fixed to the irregular push, the turnout rate becomes high. For this reason, it was possible to lower the base during non-ART (normal time) by setting the irregular push in the order of penalty push and allowing the player to digest the game by pushing forward during non-ART. In addition, the rate at which ART is used can be set higher accordingly.

However, recently, there is an idea that, even if the game is digested in any push order, it should be set so that the payout rate satisfies a certain value (for example, 55% or more). In addition, this participation rate is a value including the medal earned when shifting to the special game when the special role is won.
Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, no matter what push order is fixed and the game is digested, the expected medal acquisition value based on the bell win is
30420/65536 ≒ 0.46 (sheets)
It set so that it might become.

As a result, no matter what push order is fixed and the game is digested, the expected value of the number of medals based on the winning of the bell does not change, so that fairness can be ensured. Further, no matter which push order is fixed and the game is digested, there is no advantage / disadvantage in the rate of turnout, so the player has no real advantage to play the game with an irregular push. At the same time, from the perspective of the slot machine 10, even if a game is played by irregular pressing, the expected medal acquisition value based on the bell win does not change, so the necessity of setting the irregular pressing as a penalty is reduced. This may eliminate the need for setting a penalty.
However, in this embodiment, if an irregular push is performed, there is a possibility that the special replay 1 will win when the replay overlap wins, and if the special replay 1 wins, there is a possibility of shifting to RT2 where the replay win probability is high. Therefore, in order to prevent the transition to RT2 having a high replay winning probability, it may be necessary to set a penalty.

The cherry duplication table is used when a winning combination of cherries 01 to 04 is made, and a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped is determined so that one of the cherries 01 to 04 is stopped on the active line. is there.
As shown in FIG. 26, the symbols on the left reel 31 of cherries 01 to 04 are all “cherry” symbols. Then, as shown in FIG. 22, “cherry” symbols are arranged on the 05th and 13th of the left reel 31. Therefore, the “cherry” symbol has a “PB ≠ 1” arrangement. However, if the player is informed of the effect when the cherry overlap is won and the player pushes the left reel 31 so that the “cherry” symbol stops on the active line, the “cherry” symbol is stopped on the active line. Can do. Further, when the left reel 31 is stopped at an arbitrary position, the “cherry” symbol stops at the effective line with a probability of “½”.

Further, since the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “ANY”, any symbol may be stopped at the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped.
Furthermore, when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of the “red 7”, “BAR”, “blue 7”, and “white 7” symbols is stopped on the active line. This is because if any one of these four symbols is stopped on the active line, any of the cherries 01 to 04 can be won.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, the “red 7”, “BAR”, “blue 7”, and “white 7” symbols are arranged at intervals of 4 symbols. Therefore, any symbol can be stopped on the active line by “PB = 1”.
Thus, when winning the cherry, only the left reel 31 needs to be pressed. In addition, when all the reels 31 are stopped without making any pushes at the time of winning cherry overlap, the probability that any cherry wins is “½”.

  The non-winning table is used when all winning flags 66a are off, and defines the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that the symbol combinations corresponding to any combination do not stop on the active line. It is.

When one of the small combinations or replay is won when the 1BB winning is carried over (inside), the reel 31 is controlled to stop using the stop position determination table that prioritizes the winning of the small combination or replay.
First, when winning a replay of an internal game, priority is given to replay winning, but replay is always possible (PB = 1). Therefore, there is no case where 1BB wins in the game.

In addition, when winning the cherry in the internal game, priority is given to winning the cherry, but at the first stop on the left, the “cherry” symbol cannot be stopped on the active line, but the “BAR” symbol related to 1BB can be stopped If it is, the “BAR” symbol is stopped, and 1BB is made a stop type that can be won.
Furthermore, when winning a bell in the internal game, priority is given to the winning of the bell, but when pushing forward, the symbol related to one bell cannot be stopped on the active line, but the “BAR” symbol related to 1BB is stopped. When it is possible, the “BAR” symbol is stopped and 1BB is made a stop type that can be won.

  In FIG. 5, the winning determination means 62d of the main CPU 62 determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to any combination has stopped on the active line when all the reels 31 are stopped. The winning determination means 62d determines the symbol on the effective line by detecting the number of steps of the motor 32 after the reel sensor 39 detects the index, for example. However, the winning determination means 62d can determine the stop symbol regardless of whether or not the reel 31 is stopped when the stop switch 42 is operated and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  When all the reels 31 are stopped, the payout means 62e determines that the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations has stopped on the active line, and when the winning combination of the winning combination is determined according to the winning combination. Pay out the number of medals to the player. As described above, the payout is added as the stored number, or when the stored number exceeds “50”, the medal is actually paid out from the payout port 14. When actually paying out medals, the hopper motor 36 is driven and controlled to pay out a predetermined number of medals. At the time of paying out medals, the payout medals are detected by the payout sensors 37a and 37b, and it is checked whether or not they have been paid out correctly.

The game state control means 62f determines whether or not the game state transition condition is satisfied, and when it determines that the game state transition condition is satisfied, controls the game state to shift. Further, the game state control means 62f determines (by lottery) whether or not to execute ART.
FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state (including the internal state). Hereinafter, the state control means 62f will be described with reference to FIG.

The gaming state of the present embodiment includes a normal game and a 1BB game (special game). Further, the normal game includes a non-internal medium game and an internal medium game. Further, the non-internal game includes RT1 and RT2.
The game state control means 62f controls to shift from the next game to the internal medium game when 1BB is won in the non-internal medium game (RT1 and RT2) and 1BB is not won in the game. Further, in the internal middle game, when 1BB wins, control is performed to shift from the next game to the 1BB game. When the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied in the 1BB game, control is performed so as to shift from the next game to the non-inner middle game (RT1).

RT2 is set to ART game. Therefore, when 1BB is won during RT2, RT2 is interrupted at that point and the game shifts to an internal game. Then, after the end of the 1BB game, return to RT2 and execute the remaining ART.
When 1BB is won during ART (RT2), if 1BB is not awarded, ART may be continued (referred to as ART inside), and 1BB may be awarded after the end of ART.

  RT1 is so-called “normally” in which the non-AT and the replay winning probability are set to the normal probability. Then, the gaming state control means 62f executes the ART lottery during RT1. When RT is won at RT1 and Special Replay 1 wins, the process proceeds to RT2 (ART). RT2 (ART) is an AT game, and the combination lottery table is a game different from RT1 (replay winning probability is set to a high probability). RT2 is called “ART” because it is AT and RT (RT which means that the winning probability of replay is high).

  In addition, “AT” in the present embodiment is most advantageous to the player when winning a game result that is advantageous / disadvantageous in the game according to the operation mode of the stop switch 42 or the subsequent game. A game (notification game) for notifying the player of the operation mode of the stop switch 42. In particular, in the present embodiment, first, when the bell is won, the correct answer pressing order (pressing order for paying out 8 sheets) is notified. Second, when the replay duplication is won, the pressing order for winning the special replay 1 is notified. As a result, when RT1 (non-ART) is selected, it is possible to shift to RT2 (ART). During RT2 (ART), no fall to RT1 occurs unless the ART termination condition is satisfied.

During non-ART, the correct push order is not notified when the bell is won. Furthermore, during non-ART, it is a left first stop instruction, and an irregular pressing (middle or right first stop) is a penalty.
As shown in FIG. 31, the non-ART includes, as internal states, a low probability, a normal probability, and a high probability that have different probabilities of winning the ART, and a precursor after the ART is won. Here, the “internal state” is a concept different from the gaming state, and includes a plurality of internal states in one gaming state. In this embodiment, RT1 (non-ART) has the above four internal states.

Further, if the ART is won during the low probability, the normal probability, or the high probability, the game shifts to a precursor that is a game period before the start of the ART although the ART is won. During this sign, the player is informed that he has won the ART.
In addition, after the end of the sign, when the replay overlap win is made, the pressing order for winning the special replay 1 is notified. When the special replay 1 wins in the game, the transition condition from RT1 to RT2 (ART) is satisfied, and RT2 is started from the next game.
Furthermore, RT2 (ART) has, as an internal state, a normal probability and a high probability with different expected values on which the number of ART games is added.

The transition of these internal states is performed by a winning combination in the game. Further, the transition from one internal state to another internal state is performed at the end of the game in the one internal state (when all the reels 31 are stopped and the game result of the game is displayed).
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to a precursor, it corresponds to the winning of ART. Therefore, the lottery for determining whether or not to execute ART is executed by the gaming state control means 62f. For this reason, the game state control means 62f also serves as an ART (notification game) control means.

In the internal state of RT1, a transition is made between a low probability, a normal probability, and a high probability. For example, it is set as follows.
(1) During low probability When a cherry is elected, it shifts to a normal probability with a probability of 40%, shifts to a high probability with a probability of 5%, shifts to a precursor with a probability of 1% (no transition with a probability of 54%) .
(2) Normal probability a) At the time of cherry winning, it shifts to a high probability with a probability of 50% and shifts to a precursor with a probability of 10% (no transition with a probability of 40%).
b) At the time of replay winning, it shifts to a low probability with 5% probability (no transition with a probability of 95%).
(3) High probability a) When winning a cherry, move to a precursor with 100% probability.
d) At the time of replay winning, it shifts to a normal probability with a probability of 5% and shifts to a low probability with a probability of 3% (no transition with a probability of 92%).

  In addition, when the penalty is set due to an irregular push during the normal probability and high probability, the winning state probability of ART is shifted to an internal state lower than before, or the internal state is As it is, the ART lottery is not performed during the penalty state (or a special state in which only a very low probability is won).

When the internal state is shifted based on the irregular pressing (set to the penalty state), the internal state before the irregular pressing is shifted to end the penalty state. Returning the internal state to the state before the penalty state effectively cancels the penalty state.
The above can be set similarly during ART. During ART, it may not be set to a penalty state at all. On the other hand, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated in a pressing order different from the notified pressing order, the penalty state is set, and when the internal state has a high probability, is the transition to a low probability (with a predetermined probability)? Alternatively, the internal state is left as it is, and the number of ART games is not added and a lottery is not performed (or a special state that is added only with a very low probability).

(4) Prediction When the gaming state control means 69 decides to shift to the precursor in the lottery as described above, the number of games of the precursor is determined by lottery within the range of “1” to “32”. Set that value in the counter. Then, the counter value is decremented by “1” for each game, and when it reaches “0”, the precursor is ended. In addition, at some point in the precursor, the ART is notified of winning. In addition, once it shifts to a precursor, there is no case of shifting from a precursor to a low probability, a normal probability, or a high probability. Further, when the ART is won, it is notified that the ART is confirmed at that time, and it is not necessary to go through the precursor (the game count of the precursor is set to “0”).

At the end of the sign, an ART confirmation effect is displayed and waits until a replay overlap win is reached. Then, when the replay overlap win is received at RT1, the pressing order for winning the special replay 1 is notified. In addition, after the end of the sign, the push order for winning the special replay 1 at the time of repeated replay winning is notified, but the correct push order is not notified at the time of winning the bell.
In RT1, during non-ART, the game is digested by pushing forward, so special replay 2 wins in the game where the replay overlap is won. Even if the special replay 2 wins at RT1, there is no RT transition.

When the special replay 1 wins at RT1, the next game shifts to RT2 (ART).
In RT2 (ART), the correct pressing order is notified at the time of winning the bell until the ART termination condition is satisfied. Also, a notification is made of the pressing order for winning the special replay 1 when the replay overlap is won. Note that when the special replay 2 wins in RT2, the process shifts to RT1, but even if the special replay 1 wins, there is no RT shift.

In addition, in the non-ART where the ART is not won (when there is no notification), even if the player presses irregularly when the replay overlap is won and the special replay 1 is won, the gaming state control means 62f does not start the ART. Also, from the next game, a penalty state is set.
However, when the special replay 1 wins at RT1, the next game shifts to RT2. However, even if a transition is made from RT1 to RT2 accidentally, if the forward push is continued at RT2, special replay 2 wins and returns to RT1 when replay overlap wins.

  In particular, as in this embodiment, the push order of the stop switch 42 is set to be in a penalty state except for the first left stop, and the special replay 2 is set to win in the first left stop when the replay overlap is won. If so, the possibility of shifting to RT2 can be set low.

  Even if the player moves to RT2 by intentional irregular pressing and the winning probability of replay increases, the penalty state is set, which is disadvantageous for the player. Also, even if the irregular push is intentionally performed and the user stays at RT2, the correct push order is not notified when the bell is won. As a result, since the output rate is less than 100%, even if such an operation is performed, it is not a strategy.

There are various ART termination conditions. For example,
(1) When the number of games reaches a predetermined number (for example, if the initial number of games is “50” and “N” is added to this “50”, then “50 + N”). When the number of sheets (the number of paid-out sheets minus the number of inserted sheets) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 sheets) (2) The number of times the bell is won (in the correct answer pressing order) reaches the predetermined number (for example, 40 times) Can be mentioned.

  Further, during ART, as described above, the internal state has a normal probability and a high probability. For example, first, there is a method of always setting a normal probability at the start of ART and a method of determining by lottery whether the initial internal state of ART is a normal probability or a high probability before starting ART. Can be mentioned.

In the present embodiment, when a cherry that is a rare small role is won during ART, a lottery with an ART is performed. The higher probability than the normal probability is set to have a higher probability of being added and the number of games is increased.
For example, the ART end condition is the number of games, and the initial value of the number of games is set to “50”. Then, at the time of winning the cherry, whether or not to increase the number of games is determined by lottery. When the number of added games is determined, a process of adding the added number of games to the remaining number of games of ART at that time is performed.

For example, the following patterns are mentioned. The extra number “0” means that the extra lottery is not won.
(1) During normal probability When a cherry is won, the additional number is determined by lottery from “10” (30%), “30” (50%), and “50” (20%).
(2) High probability During cherry winning, the number of extras is determined by lottery from “30” (30%), “50” (40%), and “100” (30%).

Further, transition between normal probability and high probability during ART can be performed by a lottery result separately from a lottery result of a combination or a combination lottery.
When the internal state is shifted based on the winning lottery result, for example, during normal probability, it is possible to shift to a high probability at 50% of the time of winning the cherry.
In addition, during a high probability, it is possible to shift to the normal probability at 10% at the time of winning the replay.

The game state control means 62f continues to stay at RT2 after the transition to RT2, unless special replay 2 wins. Only when the special replay 2 wins at RT2 will the player move to RT1.
On the other hand, when the ART is finished in RT2, the push order for winning the special replay 1 at the time of the replay overlap win and the correct push order at the time of the bell win are not notified from the next game. Therefore, the game state transition (transition from RT2 to RT1) does not necessarily coincide with the end timing of ART.

It is also possible to set the same RT state (replay winning probability is the same) for non-AT and AT.
For example, the winning probability of replay in AT is set to be the same as the winning probability of replay in non-AT (about 1 / 7.3).
Further, the winning probability of replay between non-AT and AT may be set to, for example, a probability of about 1/2 (probability higher than 1 / 7.3).

  However, as in this embodiment, the winning probability of replay is set high (only ART) at RT2 that is AT, and the winning probability of replay is about 1 / 7.3 that is the normal probability at RT1 that is non-AT. If it is set to about, it is possible to lower the output rate (base) including replay during non-AT. As a result, it is possible to provide a bell that is the correct answer in pushing order when the first left stop is performed.

  However, even if the winning probability of replay during non-AT is set to about ½, it is not impossible to provide a bell that is the correct answer in the pushing order at the first left stop. An appropriate base can be set by adjusting the winning probability of the bell that is the correct answer in the pushing order at the time of the first stop on the left.

  The command transmission means 62g transmits various information (commands) to the sub control board 80. Information to be transmitted includes information that a medal has been inserted, information that the start switch 41 has been operated, information on a lottery result (winning combination), information that rotation of the reel 31 has started, Information indicating whether the stop switch 42 has been operated, information indicating that the reels 31 have been stopped, information regarding the stop position (design stopped on the active line) of each reel 31, winning combination information, gaming state (with or without ART), and internal state Information and the like.

  In FIG. 5, the main control board 60 is electrically connected to the external concentration terminal board 100. When the main control board 60 decides to execute ART, an external signal to the external concentration terminal board 100 (signal indicating that ART has been started or has been started; hereinafter also referred to as ART signal). Send. The external signal is transmitted from, for example, the external concentration terminal board 100 to a game information display device, a hall computer, or the like.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, an external signal (ART signal) indicating that the ART is activated, continued, and during the ART is transmitted. The external signal is output from the output port 6 as described above.

  As described above, at the start of the game, the player operates the bet switch 40 to insert a previously stored medal, or inserts a medal from the medal insertion slot 44 and operates the start switch 41 (ON). ) When the start switch 41 is operated, the reel control means 62c controls to drive all the motors 32 and rotate all the reels 31. As the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32 in this way, the symbols on the reel 31 are moved and displayed in the vertical direction in the display window 13 at a predetermined speed. When the start switch 41 is operated, the part lottery means 62b performs a part lottery.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 62c drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42, and performs stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32.

  Then, the game result of the game is displayed by the combination of symbols when all the reels 31 are stopped. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the winning combinations stops on the active line (when the winning combination of the winning combination), a medal corresponding to the winning combination is paid out.

In FIG. 5, the sub control board 80 controls selection and output of effects (information) during the game and during the game standby.
The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the serial communication circuit in the main CPU 62 of the main control board 60 is used to provide information necessary for production in one direction on the sub control board 80 ( Signal, data, control command, etc.).
The main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected but may be connected using an optical communication unit. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to serial communication, but may be parallel communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similarly to the main control board 60, the sub control board 80 includes an RWM 81, a sub CPU 82, and the like.
Here, an MPU including an RWM 81, a sub CPU 82, and a ROM is mounted on the sub control board 80. Further, separately from the MPU built-in RWM, the RWM is mounted outside the MPU (on the sub-control board 80). It is also possible to provide a ROM outside the MPU. For this reason, the term RWM 81 is used to include the MPU built-in RWM, external RWM, and ROM (internal / external).
The RWM (sub memory) 81 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data and the like captured when the sub CPU 82 controls effects.
The ROM (sub-ROM) is a storage medium that stores programs such as a lottery for production, various data, and the like as production data.

The sub-control board 80 is electrically connected to the following peripheral devices for effects through an input port or an output port (not shown in FIG. 5).
The effect lamp 21 is made of an LED, for example, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Note that the effect lamp 21 is arranged on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31, and a back lamp and reel 31 for illuminating from behind the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols that are continuously visible from the display window 13). Fluorescent lamps that illuminate the symbols on the reel 31 from above, a frame lamp 21 (see FIG. 1) that is arranged on the front surface of the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 and blinks when winning a winning combination.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display, and the like, and displays various effect images during the game (effect images during freeze, push order during ART, lottery results of roles) Corresponding production etc.), game information (number of games during ART, number of acquired games, etc.), etc. are displayed.
The arrangement of the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 in the slot machine 10 is as described with reference to FIG.
The push button 24 and the cross key 25 are used when displaying information intended by the player, or when a hall manager (store manager or the like) changes various settings.

The sub CPU 82 includes effect output control means 82a.
The stage output control means 82a outputs what stage (ramp, etc.) at what timing (when the start switch 41 or each stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) according to the winning combination and the gaming state, etc. It is determined by lottery how to turn on, blink, or turn off 21, what kind of sound is output from the speaker 22, and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23.
Then, the effect output control means 82a controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 in accordance with the determination. Further, during ART, the order of pressing the stop switch 42 is notified, and during ART or 1BB game, the acquired number of games during the ART or 1BB game, the remaining number of games, etc. are displayed as images.

Next, information processing by the main control board 60 (main CPU 62) will be described based on a flowchart.
Information processing by the main control board 60 described in the present embodiment is shown in FIGS. The processing outline of each figure is shown below.
Figure 32: Start of program (M_PRG_START)
Figure 33: Setting change processing (M_RANK_SET)
Figure 34: Control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET)
Figure 35: Control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET)
Figure 36: Power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON)
Figure 37: Read input ports 0-2 (SS_IN_READ)
Figure 38: Unrecoverable error handling (SS_ERROR_STOP)
FIG. 39: Main processing (M_MAIN)
Figure 40: Game start set (MS_GAME_SET)
Figure 41: Game state set (MS_ACTION_SET)
Figure 42: Game status output (MS_STATUS_SET)
Figure 43: Medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START)
Figure 44: Reading medals (S_PLAYM_READ)
Fig. 45: Reading stored number (S_CREDIT_READ)
Figure 46: Blocker ON (MS_BLOCKER_ON)
Figure 47: Adding one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC)
Figure 48: Set medal limit number (MS_MMAX_SET)
Figure 49: Waiting for medal insertion (MS_STANDBY_DSP)
Figure 50; Medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK)
51 and 52: Checks when cleaning medals (MS_INSERT_CHK)
Figure 53: Blocker off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF)
Figure 54: Addition of 1 stored sheet (MS_CREDIT_ADD)
Figure 55: Storage bet processing (MS_BET_IN)
Figure 56: Processing to subtract 1 from the number of stored sheets (MS_CREDIT_DEC)
Figure 57: Checkout process (MS_MEDAL_RET)
Figure 58: Reservation processing of stored medals (MS_CREDIT_RET)
59 and 60; one medal payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY)
Figure 61: Error display (MS_ERROR_DSP)
Figure 62: Accepting start switch (MS_START_CTL)
Figure 63: Medal payout by winning (MS_WIN_PAY)
Figure 64: Interrupt processing (I_INTR)
Figure 65: Power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN)
66 and 67; input error check (IS_ERROR_CHK)
Figure 69; Input error set (IS_ERROR_SET)
Figure 70: Send control command (IS_CMD_SET)
Figure 71: External signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL)
Figure 72: External signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT)

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing processing (M_PRG_START) when starting a program by the main control board 60.
In FIG. 32, when the program is started in step S11, the main control board 60 initializes the register in the next step S12. Specific processing includes, for example, setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 62, setting of interrupt type (for example, setting to maskable interrupt), and parity bits to be given to the control command to be transmitted (For example, setting to even parity).
In other words, initial values necessary for normal operation of the slot machine 10 are set in various registers.
In the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, an A register to an L register and a transmission register) are provided.

Next, proceeding to step S13, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off processing completion flag (_FL_POWER_OFF) is a normal value. In the present embodiment, although not shown, a power-off process completed flag is provided, and at the time of power-off, the power-off process completed flag is stored in “1” in step S652 (FIG. 65) described later. This power-off processing completion flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power was turned on. Then, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value (“1”), the process proceeds to step S14, and when it is determined that it is not a normal value (such as “0”), the process proceeds to step S16.

In step S14, a checksum of the RWM 61 is calculated. Specifically, a checksum calculation is performed in the same range (for example, a work area used in the program, an unused area, and a stack area) as the checksum of the RWM 61 executed by the power-off process. Here, in step S14, 1-byte data stored in the RWM 61 is added.
In step S15, it is determined whether or not the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is designated from the address of the RWM 61 that calculated the current checksum, and it is determined whether or not the next address is an address for calculating the checksum. When it is determined that the checksum calculation has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S14. On the other hand, when it is determined that the range of the RWM 61 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S16.

In the subsequent processing, when data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 61 is initialized, the same processing is executed in the range of the specified RWM 61 in the present embodiment.
If it is determined in step S13 that the power-off processing completed flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 61.

  In step S16, the main control board 60 stores the power-off recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is a normal value and the checksum calculation (all range) of the RWM 61 is normally completed, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off processing completed flag is an abnormal value and / or when it is determined that there is an abnormality at the time of checksum calculation (full range) of the RWM 61, the abnormal value is stored as the power-off recovery data.

  In the next step S17, the input port 1 level data is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, the process proceeds to step S18, where it is determined whether or not the designated switch is on based on the input port 1 level data. In this embodiment, the “designated switch” is a door switch (16) signal (D1), a setting door switch (54) signal (D2), and a setting key switch (52) signal among the input port 1 level data. (D3).

The door switch (16) signal is on (the front cover 11 is opened), the setting door switch (54) signal is on (the setting door is opened), and the setting key switch (52) The setting change is permitted only when the signal is on (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to the setting change process of step S22. However, when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to the setting change process of step S22. .
That is, even when the door switch (16) signal is off (when the front cover 11 is closed) or when the setting door switch (54) signal is off (when the setting door is closed). Since the setting key switch (52) signal cannot be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S18 that all the designated switches are on, the process proceeds to step S19, and when it is determined that the switch is not on, the process proceeds to step S21.
In step S19, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is abnormal. This power-off recovery data is the data stored in the register in step S16.

When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22, and when it is determined that there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S20. In step S20, it is determined whether or not a setting change disable flag (D6 bit of the medal management flag) is on. When the setting change disable flag is on, the process proceeds to step S21, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22.
In the present embodiment, the setting change impossibility flag is provided. However, when the setting change is always possible, the setting change impossibility flag may not be provided. In that case, the process corresponding to step S20 becomes unnecessary.

  In step S21, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data is a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S19. When it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S23 to perform a power recovery process (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S24, and an unrecoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP) is performed. An error when it is determined in step S21 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value is referred to as an “E1” error in the present embodiment, and “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 (described later). The unrecoverable error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the setting change process is executed.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in step S22.
First, in step S 801, “predetermined range” is stored in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 61. Here, it is a set for preparing when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, and the initialization range in which the set value data, the gaming state (for example, the RT state), and the winning flag are not initialized is “ A predetermined range.

  Next, proceeding to step S802, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the power-off recovery data (the value stored in step S16) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power-off recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S804, and the storage of “predetermined range” in step S801 is maintained. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S802 that the power-off recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S803, and the main control board 60 stores “specific range” in the register as the initialization range of the RWM 61. Here, when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, the set value data, the gaming state, and the winning flag are also set as “specific range” as the initialization range to be initialized.

  In step S804, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S801 or the specific range set in step S803 is started. In the next step S805, it is determined whether or not the initialization started in step S804 has ended. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S806.

  In step S806, an activation setting for interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing designated in step S12 are set. In the present embodiment, timer interrupt processing is used as interrupt processing, and therefore processing for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in this embodiment, “2.235 ms”) corresponds. Then, interrupt processing is executed after the processing of step S806. In other words, the interrupt process is not executed before “interrupt activation”. In the next step S807, an output request set at the start of setting change is performed. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 that the setting change process is started.

  The “output request set” is often executed also in the process described below, but means a process for setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as in step S807. To do. The control command here does not mean only a command that is actually transmitted, but also a command that is a source of a command that is actually transmitted.

Next, proceeding to step S808, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 61). Note that “control command set 1” is often executed in the processing described below, but means processing for storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 as in step S808. To do.
In the present embodiment, the control command data includes first control command data and second control command data, and different first control command data and second control command data are transmitted in response to an output request.

In step S809, the main control board 60 sets a waiting time, and executes wait processing during the waiting time in the next step S810. In this embodiment, the interrupt count “224” is set as the waiting time. In step S810, wait processing is executed until the interrupt count counts “224” (until 1 is subtracted for each interrupt count and the set interrupt count becomes “0”).
Accordingly, since “2.235 ms” per interrupt is “2.235 ms”, a wait process of “2.235 ms × 224 times = 500.64 ms (about 0.5 seconds)” is performed.
Hereinafter, the “wait process” refers to a process of waiting so that the next process (step) is not executed until a predetermined time elapses. However, the interrupt process of FIG. 64 described later is executed.

In this process, the initialization process of the RWM 61 on the main control board 60 side (step S804) is completed in a relatively short time, whereas the initialization process of the RWM 81 on the sub control board 80 side (step S702 in FIG. 73 described later). ) Takes time, wait processing is executed on the main control board 60 side. In particular, the main control board 60 cannot know whether the initialization process has been completed on the sub-control board 80 side.
Specifically, the clear range of the RWM 61 of the main control board 60 (the range that is cleared when the setting is changed) is, for example, addresses “F000 (H) to F1FF (H)” (512 bytes in number of bytes). The clear range of the RWM 81 of the control board 80 is, for example, an address “000000 (H) to 800000 (H)” (about 12 to 13 gigabytes in terms of the number of bytes).

Therefore, when the initialization process is still in progress on the sub-control board 80 side, the initialization is already finished on the main control board 60 side, and the process further proceeds, and the progress of the control process of the main control board 60 and the sub-control board It is possible to prevent the progress of the control process 80 from becoming out of synchronization.
In addition, after execution of the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 81, but sets a sufficient time for the RWM 81 initialization to be completed as a wait time. To do. Thus, after the initialization process of the RWM 81 is completed on the sub control board 80 side, the process proceeds to the processes after step S41 on the main control board 60 side.

  The control command at the start of setting change set in step S807 and step S808 is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 even during the wait process in step S810. However, while the wait process is executed in step S810, the process does not proceed to step S811 and subsequent steps (the main process does not proceed).

With this configuration, it is possible to transmit a control command at the start of setting change to the sub control board 80. Further, the processing after step S811 (end of setting change, start of game, etc.) can be delayed by the wait time. Furthermore, due to the delay in the processing after step S811, various control commands (commands at the end of setting change, commands at the time of operation of the bet switch 40, and results of the role lottery based on the operation of the start switch 41 due to the processing delay from step S811. The transmission timing of the command etc.) can be delayed. Thereby, the sub-control board 80 can control and output effects based on various commands at a timing synchronized with the processing of the main control board 60.
On the other hand, when the wait process of step S810 is not executed, the process of the main control board 60 is executed first. As a result, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated, the winning lottery result A is obtained, and when the effect a is output at the start of the rotation of the reel 31, the effect a is not output at the timing of starting the rotation of the reel 31, and the effect a is slightly delayed. Will be output.

  After the end of the wait process, the process proceeds to step S811, and it is determined whether or not the set value is in the normal range. In the present embodiment, since the set value is any one of “1” to “6” (integer), it is determined whether any of these “1” to “6”. If it is determined that the set value is in the normal range, the process proceeds to step S813, and the set value is not in the normal range (values such as “7” and “255” are stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 that stores the set value). ), The process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, “1” is stored as the set value.

In step S813, display control (lighting) of the LED whose setting is being changed is performed. Thereby, when an interrupt process is executed after this process, the LEDs (setting value display LED 63 and acquired number display LED 72) displayed during the setting change can be turned on. In the present embodiment, in order to display the current setting value on the setting value display LED 63 and display “-” on the acquisition number display LED 72, a process of updating the value of the display data is executed.
Note that each of the above values has been initialized in step S804, and is “0” before the update.

In step S814, it is determined whether an operation of the setting change switch 53 has been detected. Here, the rising data of the input port 1 is determined, and it is determined whether or not the D4 bit is “1”. When it is determined that the operation of the setting change switch 53 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S815, and when it is determined that the operation has not been detected, the process proceeds to step S816.
In step S815, the set value is updated. Specifically, the set value is stored (updated) in a predetermined area of the RWM 61. Further, by executing an interrupt process after the set value is updated, the set value display LED 63 displays the updated value.

In the next step S816, it is determined whether or not an operation of the start switch 41 is detected. In this embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is determined.
When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S817. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S814.

In step S817, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 52 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 52 has been turned off, the process advances to step S818 to perform LED display control (extinguishment) after the setting change. Specifically, first, the set value display LED 63 is turned off. Secondly, the storage number display LED 71 and the acquisition number display LED 72 can be turned on. Thirdly, a process for updating the value of the acquired number display data to display “00” on the acquired number display LED 72 is executed.
Thereby, when the interruption process is executed after the process, the set value display LED 63 is turned off, and the stored number display LED 71 and the acquired number display LED 72 can be turned on.

  Next, proceeding to step S819, as in step S807, an output request set at the end of the setting change is performed. This process is a process of ending the setting change process and notifying the determined setting value to the sub-control board 80 side and setting a control command. Next, the process proceeds to step S820, and the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1 as in step S808. And it transfers to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 39) of step S50.

Next, the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) in step S808 of FIG. 33 will be described in more detail.
A plurality of addresses are provided in the RWM 61, and a storage area for a control command buffer is set for each address. In these storage areas, control command data for transmission to the sub control board 80 (this embodiment In the form, 32 commands (64 bytes)) are stored. It does not mean that only a storage area of the control command buffer is provided in the RWM 61 with a plurality of addresses.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) in step S808 of FIG.
A plurality of addresses are provided in the RWM 61, and a storage area for the control command buffer is set for each address. In these storage areas, control command data (the main command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80) In the embodiment, 32 commands (64 bytes) are stored. It does not mean that only a storage area of the control command buffer is provided in the RWM 61 with a plurality of addresses.

First, in step S502, an interrupt prohibition process is executed. In the next step S503, control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) (FIG. 35) is executed. In step S504, the interrupt process prohibited in step S502 is canceled (that is, interrupt permission) is executed. Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the control command set 2.
In the control command set 2, the control command is written as shown below. While the control command set 2 is being executed, interrupt processing is prohibited as described above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunction (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) due to execution of interrupt processing during control command write processing.

Here, an interrupt flag for storing the prohibition / release of the interrupt is provided. The interrupt flag is turned on when the timing for executing the next interrupt process (within 2.235 ms from the time when the interrupt process is disabled) comes after the interrupt process is disabled in step S502. The main CPU 62 then clears the interrupt flag when canceling the prohibited interrupt processing.
When it is time to execute interrupt processing, the main control board 60 determines whether the interrupt flag is on or off, and determines whether interrupt processing is prohibited / permitted.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET).
First, in step S511, the address of the control command buffer is set. This process is a process for setting the head address of the control command buffer.
In the next step S512, a write pointer is acquired. The write pointer is for designating which address of the RWM 61 the control command data is to be written. Since the current write pointer is stored, a process for reading the write pointer is performed.

In the next step S513, a designated address is acquired. In this process, a write address (in the RWM 61) is obtained from the start address of the control command buffer and data indicating the current position of the write pointer.
Next, proceeding to step S514, data at a specified address is acquired. This process is a process of reading data stored in the storage area of the RWM 61 at the address obtained in step S513 of the preprocess.

  In “control command <32?” In the next step S515, processing for determining whether or not the data of the designated address is “0” is performed. When the data at the designated address is not “0”, the data already exists at the designated address. In other words, the command before transmission is in a state where 32 commands are set. When the data at the designated address is “0”, that is, when there is no data at the designated address, the process proceeds to step S516, and when it is not “0”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when there is data at the specified address, the data writing process is not executed. This prevents overwriting when there is data at the specified address.

In “RWM designation?” In the next step S516, it is determined whether or not the data to be written to the control command buffer is data that needs to refer to the data stored in the RWM 61. For example, the number of medals inserted at the time of automatic betting at the time of replay winning depends on the previous game, so RWM is specified (note that detailed description on whether or not RWM is specified is omitted, but the D register It is determined whether or not the D7 bit of the stored value is 0).
When it is determined that RWM is designated, the process proceeds to step S517, and when it is determined that RWM is not designated, the process proceeds to step S518.

In step S517, data indicating the second control command is stored in a predetermined register (E register). In this process, data to be written as the second control command is read from the RWM 61 and stored in the register. Then, the process proceeds to step S518.
In step S518, data indicating the first control command is stored in the RWM 61. Here, it is a process of storing the first control command at the address acquired in the “specified address acquisition” in step S513. Specifically, it is a process of storing the value of the D register stored before the control command set 2 process (in the case of RWM designation, a value obtained by adding 80 (H) to the value of the D register is stored. .)

In step S519, data indicating the second control command is stored in the RWM 61. In this process, the second control command is stored in the address next to the address calculated in step S513 (the next address storing the first control command).
In step S520, the value of the write pointer is updated by “+1”. Note that data indicating the first control command and the second control command is written in the storage areas of the two RWMs 61. In the calculation of the “designated address acquisition” process in step S513, the data of the write pointer is doubled. Since the calculation is performed, the value of the write pointer is incremented by “1”.

  As described above, for example, in FIG. 33, by executing the output request set at the start of setting change in step S807 and the control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) at step S808, the control command data (sub control) at the start of setting change is executed. Data to be transmitted to the substrate 80) is written into the control command buffer at a predetermined address. These control command data are transmitted to the sub-control board 80 by an interrupt process described later. The same applies to the other “output request set” and “control command set 1”.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) in step S23 in FIG.
First, in step S831, the stack pointer is restored. Here, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 61 that stores data (for example, a register value, instruction processing of the main process before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of the occurrence of the power interruption when the power interruption occurs.
In the next step S832, the set value is read, and it is determined whether or not the set value range is a normal range (“1” to “6”). When it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S833. When it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S842, and the process proceeds to a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP). In this embodiment, the error in this case is referred to as an “E6” error, and “E6” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72.

In step S833, the initialization range of the unused area of the RWM 61 is set in the register. In the next step S834, initialization of the RWM 61 in the range set in step S833 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that a value is stored in the RWM 61 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, there is a possibility that it may lead to fraud etc. Therefore, the unused area should be initialized when the power is turned on (usually once a day). Yes.
In the next step S835, it is determined whether or not the initialization of the RWM 61 is completed. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S836. In step S836, data of the input ports 0 to 2 is set, and in the next step S837, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.

In step S838, the specific information data at power-on is set. This process is a process for setting the D6 bit (transmission bit at power failure return) of the specific information flag (_FL_ERROR_INF) to “1”. In the next step S839, the external signal 4 output time is set at the time of power-off recovery. In this process, “136” is set as the external signal 4 output time (TM1_POWER_ON) at the time of power-off recovery. As a result, this value is subtracted for each interrupt.
In the next step S840, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process for setting a timer interruption period, and is similar to step S806 described above.
In step S841, the power-off process completion flag (_FL_POWER_OFF) is cleared, that is, set to “0”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In the power recovery process described above, after the input ports 0 to 2 are read (step S837), the interrupt process is started (step S840). The reason is as follows.
As will be described later, a setting key can be inserted to check the set value while waiting for a game. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 becomes “1”, it is determined that the confirmation of the setting value is completed.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is cut off during setting confirmation, and the power is turned on by turning off the setting key switch 52 (with the setting key removed) during the power cut.

In this case, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 52 is turned off by the interrupt processing after the power is restored, so that the falling of the setting key switch is detected. The
As a result, the state at the time of power-off recovery is different from the state before the power-off. Specifically, the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “0” in the state before the power is turned off, whereas the falling signal of the setting key switch 52 is “1” when the power is restored.
Therefore, in order to avoid the situation before and after the power is turned off in this way, when the power is turned off, the values of the RWM 61 of the input ports 0 to 2 are updated to the latest state. After executing the read process, the interrupt process is activated.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the input port 0-2 read processing (SS_IN_READ) in step S837 of FIG.
First, in step S851, the previous input port 0 level data is set. In this processing, the address (F008) of the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD) stored in the RWM 61 is stored in the HL register (HL = F008). Then, the address data indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register.
In the next step S852, the current input port 0 level data is set. In this process, data input to the input port 0 is stored in the A register.
In step S853, the current input data is changed to positive logic. In this processing, the data is changed to positive logic by the XOR operation of the data stored in the A register and the above-described input port 0 negative logic bit (000001011), and the converted value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S854, input port 0 level data is set. This process performs an AND operation on the A register value as the operation result in step S853 and “11101111”, stores the operation result in the A register, and stores this A register value in the input port 0 level data (_PT_IN0_OLD). Remember. That is, by this process, the value of the input port 0 level data is updated. The reason why the AND operation with “11101111” is executed is to ensure that the unused D4 bit is set to “0”.
In step S855, the current and previous change bit data are generated. In this process, the current input port 0 level data (A register value) and the previous input port 0 level data (B register value) are XORed, and the result is stored in the A register.

In the next step S856, input port 0 rising data is generated. In this process,
1) An AND operation is performed on the change bit value (A register value) generated in step S855 and the input port 0 level data (the value stored in “_PT_IN0_OLD”) set in step S854, and the operation result is stored in the A register. To remember.
2) Next, “1” is added to the L register value. As a result, “HL = F009” is obtained.
3) Next, the value stored in the A register is stored in the address indicated by the HL register, that is, “F009” (input port 0 rising data) (_PT_IN0_UP).

  In step S858, the RWM 61 address of the next input port data is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the L register value. As a result, since “L = 0A”, “HL = F00A” is obtained. That is, the address indicates input port 1 level data.

From step S859 to step S862, processing similar to that from step S851 to step S854 is executed for the input port 1. Here, description of these processes is omitted.
In step S863, the door switch signal (D1 bit) and the setting door switch signal (D2 bit) are read based on the input port 1 level data set in step S862. In the next step S864, it is determined whether or not these data are on (“1”). When both are on, the process proceeds to step S866, and when both are not on, the process proceeds to step S865. In step S865, the setting key switch signal (D3 bit) and the setting change / reset switch signal (D4 bit) are cleared (set to “0”). Then, the process proceeds to step S866.
In steps S866 to S868, the same processing as in steps S855 to S857 is performed for the input port 1. Description of this process is omitted.

In the next steps S869 to S871, falling data of the input port 1 is generated. Only the input port 1 generates the falling data. This is because it is necessary to detect that the setting key switch 52 has been turned from on to off when checking the setting.
In step S869, the address of the RWM 61 of the input port 1 rising data is set. In this process, “1” is added to the L register value (the L register value at this time is “0B”), and “L = 0C” is set. As a result, “HL = F00C” is obtained, and an address indicating the falling data of the input port 1 is obtained.

In step S870, falling data is generated. The fall data is generated as described with reference to FIG. 8, and the current input port 1 level data and the previous input port 1 level data are XORed to generate change data. Then, if the change data and the current input port 1 level data are ANDed, the rising data of the input port 1 is obtained.
In step S871, the input port 1 falling data generated in step S870 is set. In this process, the generated falling data is stored in the input port 1 falling data (_PT_IN1_DOWN). That is, by this process, the value of the input port 1 falling data is updated.

In the next step S872, similarly to step S858, the address of the RWM 61 of the next input port data is set. This process is a process of adding “1” to the L register value. As a result, since “L = 0D”, “HL = F00D” is obtained. That is, the address indicates the input port 2 level data.
The next steps S873 to S875 are the same as steps S852 to S854, and the process of setting the level data of the input port 2 is executed. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing non-recoverable error processing (SS_ERROR_STOP) in step S24 and the like in FIG.
First, in step S881, the main control board 60 prohibits interrupt processing. This process is the same as step S502 described above. Control is performed so that no interrupt is generated even when an interrupt request signal (INT signal) is input. In other words, the timer interrupt process is not executed even when the timer interrupt period (2.235 ms) arrives. As a result, updating of various data stored in the RWM 61 by interruption processing, input / output, etc. are not executed, and erroneous information is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 or transmitted to the hall computer. It is preventing.

In step S882, the output ports 0 to 6 are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all “0” (“00000000”) is output from each address indicating the output ports 0 to 6 for each output port. In step S883, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by “1”. For example, when the address of the output port 0 is “0F1 (H)”, the address “0F2 (H)” of the output port 1 is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S884, it is determined whether or not all output ports have been completed, that is, whether or not output port 6 has been completed. If it is determined that the process has not been completed, the process returns to step S882. If it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S885.

That is, by turning off all the output ports 0 to 6, the active signal output before the processing is executed is turned off. This can prevent LED burn-in, motor 32 burn-in, and medal swallowing. For example, in the situation where the blocker signal is being output, if the power is cut off, the blocker 47 will remain on (the medal flow path is formed) unless the processing is executed (medal detection). Since no processing takes place, medals are swallowed).
If the power is cut off while the motor 32 is outputting φ1, unless the processing is executed, φ1 is continuously output until a reset signal is input. Normally, the time until the reset signal is input is short, but when the power supply voltage is reduced instantaneously, the power-off process is executed and then the normal power supply voltage is supplied. It will repeat the wait for reset without being done. For this reason, a situation in which φ1 continues to be output may occur.

In step S885, the lower digit is set as error display data. In step S886, upper digits are set as error display data.
In step S887, the LED is turned off. This process is a process of outputting “00000000” to the address indicating the output port 0. Therefore, at the time of step S887, the output of all LEDs is “0” (lights off). Thereby, the flicker of LED can be prevented.
In the next “error display output” process in step S888, a process of outputting a predetermined value to the address indicating the output port 1 is performed. Here, “E1”, “E5”, “E6”, “E7”, etc. are displayed as error display contents.

  In step S889, the LED is turned on. This process is a process of outputting a predetermined value to the address indicating the output port 0. In the next step S890, it is determined whether or not the display weight has ended. Here, the display weight is a process of subtracting “−1” from the value of the B register and determining whether or not the value of the B register becomes “0”.

In this embodiment, “255” is set as the value of the B register at the start of the processing in step S888. The subtraction process is performed until the B register value becomes “0”. In this embodiment, the internal system clock is 16 MHz, and approximately
“1 / Internal system clock (16 MHz)” × 256 × 8 (command) + α (other commands) ≈0.128 ms
The B register is set to be “255” → “0” at

If it is determined that the display weight has ended, the process proceeds to step S891. In step S891, switching between the upper digit and the lower digit is executed. Then, the process returns to step S887.
Thereby, it is possible to switch from the lower digit display to the upper digit display by the same program processing. Further, the switching cycle of the upper digit / lower digit is about 0.128 ms. Therefore, after the upper digit is lit for 0.128 ms, the process of lighting the lower digit for 0.128 ms is repeated.

  For example, when the “E1” error is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 by the processing of step S887 to step S891, after “E” is displayed for about 0.128 ms in the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 72 ( Next, “1” is displayed for about 0.128 ms in the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 72 (the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 72 is turned off during this period).

Further, the switching cycle of the upper digit / lower digit is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (2.235 ms), and the luminance at the time of error display is increased (details will be described later).
In other words, when an error is displayed using an LED, the non-recoverable error has a higher luminance than the normal error, so the devices on the sub-control board 80 side (effect lamp 21, speaker 22, image display device 23) Even if the error notification using is not performed (even if it is not possible), the hall clerk can easily notice.
As described above, even when an error occurs during the period when timer interrupt processing is not executed (not desired to be executed), the error display is appropriately performed using the LED by the arithmetic processing using the register and the hardware configuration. can do.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing in the present embodiment.
Then, during this main process, an interrupt process (FIG. 64) is performed every 2.235 ms.

In FIG. 18, in step S51, a stack pointer is set. As described above, the stack pointer refers to an area of the RWM 61 that stores data (for example, register values, instruction processing of the main process before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of the occurrence of the power interruption when the power interruption occurs. The setting of the stack pointer is a process of setting a register value to an initial value in the RWM 61 area.
In the next step S52, game start set processing (MS_GAME_SET) is performed. If it progresses to step S52, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 40 mentioned later.

In the next step S53, a bet medal is read (S_PLAYM_READ). This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time, and is different from reading of the stored number. The bet medal reading process will be described later (FIG. 44).
In the next step S54, the presence / absence of a bet medal is determined based on the bet number read in step S53.

  If it is determined in step S54 that a bet medal is present (zero flag described later is “0”), the process proceeds to step S56, and if it is determined that there is no bet medal (zero flag is “1”), the process proceeds to step S55 and a medal insertion waiting process ( MS_STANDBY_DSP; FIG. 49) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S56.

In step S56, the management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of the inserted medal is performed. If it progresses to step S106, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 50 mentioned later.
In the next step S57, a soft random number update process is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” by one) a processing random number for processing (arithmetic processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used in the role lottery means 62b. The soft random number is a 16-bit random number having a range of 0 to 65535. As an update method, a process of adding an interrupt count value (a count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) to a value before update may be executed.

  In the next step S58, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the start switch 41 has been operated. When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S59, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S53. Even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the number of bets has not reached the prescribed number of the game, “No” is determined in step S58. When the specified number is reached, the start switch acceptance permission flag (the “D0” bit of the medal management flag) is turned on.

In step S59, when the process proceeds to step S59 for executing the process (MS_START_CTL) when the start switch is received, the process proceeds to the process of FIG.
In step S60, the combination lottery means 62b executes the combination lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of the lottery is acquired in step S59. In step S60, a process is performed to determine whether the acquired random number value is a random value corresponding to any winning combination using the combination lottery table.

  In the next step S61, the reel control means 62c starts to rotate the reel 31. In step S62, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 has been received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the combination and the position of the reel 31, The reel 31 is controlled to stop at the determined position.

  In the next step S63, the reel control means 62c checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S64. In step S64, it is determined whether or not all the reels 31 are stopped. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S65. When it is determined that all the reels 31 are not stopped, the process returns to step S62. .

In step S65, symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 62d determines whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stopped on the active line. Then, the symbol combination flag (_FL_WIN) is updated in accordance with the stopped symbol combination. For example, when it is determined that the replay symbol combination has stopped at the active line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to “1”.
In step S65, the value of the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is updated. For example, when one winning combination wins and the medal payout number data until that time is “0”, “0” is updated to “1”.
In step S66, it is determined whether a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a symbol display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S71. If it is determined that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S67.

  Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, the reel 31 does not normally stop at a position other than the position determined by the stop position determination table. However, as a result of the display determination of the symbol, when a symbol that should not be displayed (a kicked symbol) is displayed on the active line, it is determined that there is an abnormality, and when the process proceeds to step S71, it cannot be restored. Perform error handling. This symbol combination abnormality error is referred to as an “E5” error, and “E5” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72, and the main process is stopped.

Note that when an unrecoverable error (and the unrecoverable error described later) occurs, it is necessary to turn on / off the power and reset the set value in order to cancel the error. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power is turned off, the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, and the power is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range (setting value information, RT information, winning combination information) of the RWM 61 is cleared. Then, a set value is set, and if there is no other error, a return process is performed.
On the other hand, when a recoverable error such as a full error described later occurs, the error content is displayed and the processing is stopped (for example, step S239 in FIG. 51 described later), but the hall clerk performs an error canceling operation (error When the reset switch 53 is operated by removing the cause) and operating the reset switch 53, the process is resumed when it is determined that the error has been cancelled.

  Next, in step S67, when there is a winning combination, the payout means 62e pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination (MS_WIN_PAY; FIG. 63). Next, proceeding to step S68, the main control board 60 performs a game end check. This process includes clearing the winning combination flag (RWM61), determining the pressing order of the stop switch 42, setting the weight, processing for shifting to a freeze state when performing freeze, and processing for generating external signal data when transmitting an external signal Etc. The operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is turned on in accordance with the winning combination at the start of the game (after the winning lottery (step S60)), and is turned off in step S68. However, when the 1BB is won, the D1 bit of the operation state flag is turned on, and the on state of the D1 bit is carried over to the next game unless 1BB wins.

  In step S68, the signal of the full sensor 38, which is the D5 bit of the input port 2, is determined. If it is on, a full error is displayed. The full error is referred to as “FE error” in this embodiment, and “FE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72.

In the next step S69, an output request at the end of the game is set. This process is a process of setting control command data for transmitting to the sub-control board 80 that one game has been completed.
In step S70, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1. This process is a process of storing control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 61).
And when the process of step S70 is complete | finished, it returns to step S50 again.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the game start set (MS_GAME_SET) in step S52 of FIG.
First, in step S120, a game standby display time is set. In this embodiment, “26846” interrupt (≈60,000 ms, that is, about 60 seconds (1 minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in step S121, the number of interruptions is counted (subtracted) from this point.
When the game standby display time becomes “0”, the medal payout number data is cleared in step S55 of FIG. 39 (processing to set “_NB_PAY_MEDAL” to “0”). That is, “00” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72. For example, even if the number of medals paid out in the previous game is “8” and the player pays out by operating the checkout switch 43 and ends the game, “00” is displayed after about one minute. Is done. Thereby, it has the effect that a vacant stand can be reduced by being able to recognize a hall clerk and another player as a vacant stand.
In the next step S121, the main control board 60 performs a gaming state set process (MS_ACTION_SET) (FIG. 41).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the game state setting process (MS_ACTION_SET) in step S121 of FIG. This process is a process of setting the state based on the result of the previous game before the start of the game, at the time of the replay operation or in the case of 1BB game.
First, in step S122, data of a symbol combination display flag is acquired. In this process, the symbol combination on the active line after the reel 31 is stopped in the previous game, that is, data relating to a winning combination is stored in the register from the RWM 61 (symbol combination display flag; _FL_WIN).
In the next step S123, an operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. For example, at the time of winning a replay, an operation state flag related to the replay is generated based on the data stored in step S122. In the next step S124, the operating state flag is updated and stored. That is, the operation state flag is replaced with the operation state flag generated in step S124 (for example, the D0 bit of “_FL_ACTION” is set to “1” when winning a replay). Then, the operating state flag is saved (stored).

  In the next step S125, based on the symbol flag data acquired in step S122, it is determined whether or not a combination of symbols for replay is displayed (whether the replay has won a prize). When it is determined that the replay symbol combination is displayed, the process proceeds to step S126. When it is determined that the replay pattern combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S128.

  In step S126, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal (FIG. 44). This process is a process of reading the number of medals bet in the previous game. In step S127, automatic bet number data is set. This process is a process of updating data of “_NB_REP_MEDAL” storing the automatic bet number. Then, the process proceeds to step S128, and the game state output process (MS_STATUS_OUT) is entered.

FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the game state output process (MS_STATUS_OUT) in step S128 of FIG. This process is a process of transmitting a command related to the gaming state to the sub-control board 80.
First, in step S129, an output request for an operating state is set. In the next step S130, the control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated or 1BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Although not shown in the figure, information regarding the set value of the current game, information regarding the RT state of the current game, and the like are also transmitted. Then, the process proceeds to a medal acceptance start process (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S131.

FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing medal acceptance start (MS_MEDAL_START) in step S131 of FIG.
First, in step S134, the data of the number of betdal is cleared. That is, it is a process of clearing the bet number in the previous game, and specifically, a process of setting the value of the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) to “0” is performed.
Next, it progresses to step S135 and the process which extinguishes insertion display LED (73e-73g) is performed. Specifically, the D5 to D7 bits of the input display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) are set to “0”.
In the next step S136, the medal management flag is initialized. Specifically, processing is performed to set the D0, D2-D4, D6, and D7 bits of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “0”.

  In the next step S137, the main control board 60 checks the operating state flag. Here, the operation state flag is checked in order to determine whether or not the replay operation is being performed in the next step S138. In the present embodiment, in step S138, the value of the D0 bit (replay) of the operating state flag (_FL_ACTION) is read.

Next, the process proceeds to step S138, and based on the reading in step S137, it is determined whether or not the replay operation is being performed, that is, whether or not the D0 bit is “1”. When the D0 bit is “1”, that is, when it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S139, and when it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S149.
If it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed and the process proceeds to step S149, a process of turning on the blocker 47 is executed, and the process of this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the replay is not operated, the medal maintenance is uniformly permitted.
Therefore, in the medal acceptance start process of this flowchart, the process after step S139 corresponds to the medal automatic bet process during the replay operation.

  In step S139, a standby time during replay operation is set. In the next step S140, wait processing is executed. In this embodiment, in order to set about 500 ms as the wait time, a count value “237” (237 × 2.235 ms = about 529.7 ms) of the number of interrupts is set. Then, this count value is subtracted for each interrupt, and wait processing is executed until it becomes “0”. The reason why this wait process is provided is to prevent the replay display LED 73a from being turned on immediately after the game is finished (step S144) or automatically bet immediately after the game is finished (step S147) (appearance) Because this is not preferred).

Note that the betting sound at the time of automatic betting is output based on the commands stored in step S145 and step S146.
Furthermore, it is possible to vary the wait time according to the type of replay that has won. For example, when the special replay 1 is won (that is, when ART is started), a wait time of 1 second or more may be set.

  In step S141, the number of stored sheets is read (FIG. 45; S_CREDIT_READ). In the next step S142, it is determined whether or not the stored number is the limit number (in this embodiment, 50). When it is determined that the number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S144. When it is determined that the number is not the limit number, the process proceeds to step S143. In this process, the stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT_LED) is read and the stored number is checked.

In step S143, control is performed to turn on the blocker (FIG. 46; MS_BLOCKER_ON), that is, to accept the medal. Then, the process proceeds to step S144.
As described above, first, when it is not during the replay operation, the blocker 47 is always turned on to accept the medal. This is because when the replay operation is not in progress, even if the number of stored games was the upper limit (50) in the previous game, the bet medals (3 in the normal game) are consumed, and that amount can be bet. .

Second, when the number of stored medals is not the limit number at the time of replay operation, the blocker 47 is turned on to accept medals. This is because when the number of stored medals is not the limit number, at least the number of stored medals can be added by caring for medals.
Third, when the number of stored medals is the limit number at the time of replay operation, the blocker 47 is not turned on (the blocker 47 is kept off until then). This is because when the replay operation is performed and the number of stored medals is the upper limit number, medals cannot be betted and the number of stored medals cannot be added, so that no medals are accepted.

In step S144, a replay display LED lighting process is performed. In step S144, processing for turning on ("1") the D3 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) is executed.
Note that the process of actually turning on the replay display LED 73a is performed by the LED display control in step S606 in an interrupt process (FIG. 64) described later.

In the next step S145, an output request set process for transmitting a command indicating that an automatic bet has been made is performed on the sub-control board 80, and a control command set 1 process is executed in the next step S146. .
In the next step S147, a process for adding one medal (in this case, means an automatic bet process), that is, an automatic bet (addition) of medals one by one in order to place an automatic bet based on a replay winning. Process. Details of the medal addition process will be described later (FIG. 47; MS_MEDAL_INC). In the next step S148, it is determined whether or not the medal limit number has been reached (for example, three in normal game), and if it is determined that the medal limit number has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the medal limit number has not been reached, the process returns to step S147, and the medal one addition (automatic bet) process is executed again.

  In the above-described processing, the automatic bet processing (steps S147 to S148) is performed after the output request setting processing at the time of automatic betting and the transmission of commands at the time of automatic betting (steps S145 and S146). After completion of the above, output request setting processing at the time of automatic betting and transmission of a command at the time of automatic betting may be performed.

In this embodiment, when a replay is won, for example, weight processing is not provided to automatically bet three medals at once, but weight processing can also be provided. For example, if it is determined in step S148 that the number is not the limit number of medals, the standby time set and wait processing as shown in steps S139 and S140 may be executed, and then control may be returned to step S147.
When the wait process is provided in this manner, the medal one-piece addition process, which will be described later, is executed each time a predetermined time elapses. Therefore, the inserted number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED) is updated every time the predetermined time elapses. . Thereby, it can show to a player so that insertion display LED73e-73g may light sequentially.

  Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 43, it is determined whether or not the storage limit number is reached in step S142. If the number is not the storage limit number, processing for turning on the blocker 47 in order to enable maintenance of medals (step Although S143) is executed, for example, when a replay is won, it is possible to set the medal care insertion impossible. In the case of controlling in this way, if it is determined in step S138 that the replay operation is being performed, after the processing in steps S139 and S140, the process proceeds to step S144 (the processing in steps S141 to S143 is eliminated). Good.

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing medal reading processing (S_PLAYM_READ) (step S53 in FIG. 39, etc.). First, in step S151, the main control board 60 reads medal number data. Here, the value of medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) stored in the RWM 61 is read, and the read bet medal number data is stored in a predetermined register (A register).
Next, in step S152, the main control board 60 checks the number of medals read in step S151. Specifically, when the value of the A register is “0”, the zero flag (flag register) is set to “1”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the stored number reading process (S_CREDIT_READ) in step S141 of FIG. First, in step S155, the main control board 60 reads data on the number of stored sheets. The processing here is processing for storing the value of the stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT_LED) stored in the RWM 61 in a predetermined register (for example, A register). Next, in step S156, the number of stored sheets read in step S155 is checked. Specifically, when the value of the A register is “0”, the zero flag (flag register) is set to “1”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the blocker-on process (MS_BLOCKER_ON) in step S143 of FIG.
First, in step S161, the main control board 60 checks the passage of the blocker monitoring time. The blocker monitoring time is set in advance to a predetermined value (46 interruption: about 102 ms), and time measurement is started when the passage sensor 46 is turned on (when a medal is detected). Next, the process proceeds to step S162, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time by the timer has elapsed. When it is determined that the time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S163, and when it is determined that the time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S161.
The reason for controlling in this way is to prevent the medal from being caught by the blocker 47. Specifically, if about 102 ms has elapsed since the medal was detected by the passage sensor 46, it can be determined that the medal detected by the passage sensor 46 has already passed the blocker 47. In other words, if the blocker 47 is driven within about 102 ms after the passage sensor 46 is turned on, the blocker 47 may pinch medals detected by the passage sensor 46.

  In step S163, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption from this point. As described above, during the execution of the main process (M_MAIN), one timer interrupt process is entered every 2.235 ms. After the execution of the “interrupt disabled” process in step S163, the interrupt disabled is canceled. Controls not to allow interrupts until

In the next step S164, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning on the blocker signal. This process is a process of storing data in the RWM 61 for setting the D6 bit signal of the output port 3 to “1”. Specifically, in the “blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data (_PT_BLK_HPM)”, the D6 bit (blocker signal) is set to “1”.
In the present embodiment, it is possible to output a maximum of eight data to each output port, not limited to the output port 3. Also, output is executed by interrupt processing. That is, at this timing, the D6 bit of the output port 3 is not turned on, but after being stored in the RWM 61 once, the data is output based on the data stored in the RWM 61 during the process of outputting the output port 3.

  In the next step S165, the value of the input monitoring counter is cleared. Here, the insertion monitoring counter is a counter that is set to “+1” when the passage sensor 46 detects a medal and is set to “0” when the insertion sensors 48a and 48b detect a medal. In other words, the counter repeats “+1” and “0” in the normal state. This is because when the blocker 47 is turned on, that is, when a medal path is formed by the blocker 47, the medal is detected by the path sensor 46.

  In the next step S166, the flag of the blocker signal state is turned on. Here, a process of turning on (“1”) the D2 bit of the above-described medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S167, where the interrupt inhibition set in step S163 is canceled, that is, the interrupt is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above, the reason for not generating an interrupt between the processes of steps S164 to S166 is as follows.
In the present embodiment, the blocker signal is turned on in step S164, and the blocker state signal is turned on in step S166. In this case, when an interrupt occurs between step S164 and step S166, one is turned on and the other is turned off. Specifically, due to an interrupt process that is entered midway, there is an inconsistency that ON is not output (not lit) to the input enable display LED 73b even though ON is output to the blocker 47. Become. In other words, in order to avoid such a state and to update both values at once, it is possible to control so as not to confuse the player by prohibiting interrupt processing. Note that the processing is executed in the order of steps S164, S165, and S166 in the present embodiment, but the order of these may not be the same as the processing order in the present embodiment. For example, the order of steps SS166, S165, and S164 may be used.

  In this embodiment, the blocker 47 is turned on after about 100 ms from the passage sensor 46 detecting a medal to form a medal passage. The reason for this setting is to prevent the blocker 47 from being turned on at the moment when the inserted medal (medal detected by the passage sensor 46) reaches the blocker 47, and the medal is prevented from being caught by the blocker 47. Therefore, after the passage sensor 46 detects a medal, the blocker 47 is controlled not to be turned on until a predetermined time (a time during which the medal may be pinched) elapses.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the process of adding one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC) in step S147 of FIG.
The process of adding one medal in FIG. 47 is a process that is commonly used at the time of betting a medal, at the time of an automatic bet based on the replay display, and at the time of a storage bet based on the operation of the bet switch 40. Thus, even when the bet processing to be executed is different, the program capacity can be reduced by using the common processing (program).
First, in step S171, the main control board 60 reads a bet medal (FIG. 44; S_PLAYM_READ). In the next step S172, a process of adding “1” to the number of bet medals (“+1”) is performed. Then, the calculation result is stored in the C register. For example, if the number of bet medals so far was “0”, by adding “1”,
C register value = 00000001
It becomes.

In this process, the value of medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) stored in the RWM 61 is read, the read bet medal number data is stored in a predetermined register (for example, A register), and the value of the A register is “1”. And the A register value after addition is stored (updated) in the medal bet number data.
For example, if the read bet medal number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is “0”
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 0
A register value = 00000000
A register value = 00000001 (after adding "1")
_NB_PLAY_MEDAL = 1
It becomes.

In the next step S175, the main control board 60 performs display clear processing for the acquisition number display LED 72. Although not shown in the present embodiment, the RWM 61 stores acquired number display data (_NB_PAY_LED). In step S175, the acquired number display data is cleared.
This processing is performed so that the value of the A register becomes “0” (for example, an exclusive OR of the A register value and the A register value), and the A register value after the operation is used as the acquired number display data. A process of storing (updating) is executed.
The process of actually displaying the acquired number display LED 72 is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.

Next, proceeding to step S176, the main control board 60 generates lighting data for the input display LEDs 73e to 73g. Note that the process of actually turning on the input display LEDs 73e to 73g is performed in the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process described later, as described above.
First, “1” is added to the value of the A register. Since the A register value before addition is “0” by the process of step S175,
A register value (before addition): 00000000
A register value (after addition): 00000001
It becomes.
Next, the A register value is shifted to the right by one digit. This shift process is not only a right shift but also a cyclic shift instruction that sets the value of the D0 bit to D7, and is also called a rotate shift. This process
A register value (before shift): 00000001
A register value (after shift): 10000000
It becomes.

In the next step S177, the main control board 60 determines whether or not generation of lighting data for the number of inserted sheets has been completed. Specifically, it is as follows.
First, “1” is subtracted from the C register value. Since the C register value is “1” as described above,
C register value (before operation): 00000001
C register value (after operation): 00000000
It becomes.
Then, when the C register value is not “0”, “No” is set in step S177, and when it is “0”, “Yes” is set.

If it is determined in step S177 that the number of inserted sheets has not been completed, the process returns to step S176, and generation of lighting data is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of inserted sheets has been completed, the process proceeds to step S178, and the main control board 60 performs control to store lighting data of the inserted sheet number display LED in the RWM 61.
The actual lighting control using the inserted number display LED signal data is performed by an interrupt process described later.
Specifically, the process of step S178 is as follows.
First, the A register value is stored in the insertion number display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED). Therefore,
Input display LED signal data: 10000000
It becomes.

In addition, when one medal has already been inserted, it is as follows.
In step S172,
C register value = 00000010
It becomes.
In step S176,
A register value (before addition): 00000000
A register value (after addition): 00000001
It becomes.
further,
A register value (before shift): 00000001
A register value (after shift): 10000000
It becomes.

In the next step S177,
C register value (before operation): 00000010
C register value (after operation): 00000001
It becomes.
Therefore, since the C register value ≠ “0”, the process returns to step S176.
In step S176,
A register value (before addition): 10000000
A register value (after addition): 10000001
It becomes.
further,
A register value (before shift): 10000001
A register value (after shift): 11000000
It becomes.

Next, the process proceeds to step S177.
C register value (before operation): 00000001
C register value (after operation): 00000000
It becomes.
Since the C register value = “0”, “Yes” is determined in the step S177, and the process proceeds to the step S178.
Thereby, in step S178,
Insertion number display LED signal data: 11000000
It becomes.
In this way, by using the registers (C register, A register) and the shift process, the input number display LED signal data can be stored in the corresponding data with a small program process (simple program).

After step S178, the process proceeds to step S179, and the main control board 60 sets the medal limit number (MS_MMAX_SET) (FIG. 48 described later).
The medal limit number means the maximum number of medals that can be bet in the game (or the number of medals that must be bet in the game). Specifically, in the present embodiment, since the maximum number of medals that can be bet differs in the gaming state, it means the maximum number of medals that can be bet in the gaming state. In particular, in this embodiment, a maximum of 3 medals can be bet in a normal game, and a maximum of 2 medals can be bet in an MB game. Therefore, the medal limit number excluding during the MB game is 3, and the medal limit number during the MB game is 2.

Next, proceeding to step S180, the main control board 60 performs a betting medal reading process (S_PLAYM_READ) (same as step S171).
In the next step S181, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number is a limit number. Specifically, by subtracting the bet number (value of the C register) from the medal limit number (value of the A register), if “0”, it is determined that the bet number is the limit number. When it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that the bet number is the limit number, the process proceeds to step S182. In step S182, a medal limit flag is set. Here, a process of setting the D7 bit of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) to “1” is executed. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the medal limit number setting process (MS_MMAX_SET) in step S179 of FIG. In step S201, the limit number for automatic betting is set. Note that the automatic bet is that medals are automatically inserted when a replay is won. In the present embodiment, this corresponds to the process of storing the value of “_NB_REP_MEDAL” in the C register. For example, if the value of “_NB_REP_MEDAL” is “3”, the C register value = “3”.
In the next step S202, the value of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION) is read.

In the next step S203, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the D0 bit of the operation state flag read in step S202 is “1” (whether or not it is during replay operation). Here, for example, when the D0 bit of the data read in step S202 is “1”, it is determined that the replay is operating, and when it is “0”, it is determined that the replay is not operating. When it is during the replay operation, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is not during the replay operation, the process proceeds to step S204. That is, at the time of the replay operation, the C register value “3” becomes the automatic bet number.
On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step S204, “2” is stored in the C register as the limit number of medals.

  Next, proceeding to step S205, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game is a game with a limit of 2 medals. As described above, for example, when the game is a normal game, it is determined that the medal limit number is not two, and when the game is 1BB, it is determined that the medal limit number is two. For example, if the D2 bit of the data read in step S202 is “0”, it is determined that the game is not limited to two medals (1BB game), and if it is “1”, the game is limited to two medals. A method of determining that it is time (during 1BB game) is given.

  When the medal limit number is 2, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. Thereby, the medal limit number is set to “2”. On the other hand, when it is determined that the medal limit number is not two, the process proceeds to step S206, and "1" is added to the C register value. As a result, the C register value becomes “3”, and this “3” is set as the medal limit number.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the medal insertion wait (MS_STANDBY_DSP) in step S55 of FIG.
First, in step S411, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 52 is on. Here, it is determined whether or not the D3 bit is “1” in the input port 1 rising data. When the rising data of the setting key switch 52 is on, the process proceeds to step S412. When it is determined that the setting key switch 52 is not on, the process proceeds to step S421. That is, when the setting key switch 52 is turned on in the medal insertion waiting state (when a setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion slot), the setting confirmation mode is entered, and the processing of steps S412 to S420 is executed. The setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the current setting value is confirmed (confirmed visually by the administrator), and the setting value cannot be changed.

  In the present embodiment, the determination in step S411 is performed based on the rising data of the setting key switch 52. Thus, for example, when the setting key switch 52 is turned on during a game, the rising data is off (the setting key switch 52 is on) even if the determination in step S411 is performed, and therefore the setting confirmation mode is not entered. The setting value cannot be confirmed illegally. Of course, if these are not taken into consideration, the determination in step S411 or step S416 described later may be performed by turning the setting key switch 52 on and off.

In step S412, the blocker 47 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 53 described later). Thus, even if a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 44, it is returned from the payout slot 14.
In the next step S413, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the start of setting value display. In the next step S414, control command data to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 at the start of setting value display is set.

  Next, proceeding to step S415, the main control board 60 performs a process of lighting the set value display LED 63. Thereby, the set value display LED 63 can be turned on, and the current set value can be displayed. The process of actually turning on / off the set value display LED 63 is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S416, and it is continuously determined whether or not the signal of the setting key switch 52 has been turned off. In this process, contrary to step S411, it is determined whether or not the falling data of the D3 bit of the input port 1 has become “1”. When it is determined that the signal of the setting key switch 52 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S417, and the main control board 60 executes a process of turning off the setting value display LED 63.

Next, proceeding to step S418, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of setting value display. Then, in the next step S419, control command data at the end of setting value display, which is transmitted to the sub control board 80, is set.
In the next step S420, the main control board 60 performs a process of turning on the blocker (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 46). Next, proceeding to step S421, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game standby display time has passed the “26846” interrupt (about 60 seconds) set in step S120 (FIG. 40).

When it is determined that the game standby display time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S422, and a process of clearing the display of the acquired number display LED 72 is executed. This process is the same as the process in step S175 of FIG. 47 described above. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S421 that the game standby display time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
That is, in this embodiment, when the game is not performed for a predetermined time, the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 is cleared, but the replay display LED 73a, the storage number display LED 71, and the input display LEDs 73e to 73g are not cleared. It is composed. As a result, the number of bets that can be bet, that a player can play again, or that can be reimbursed continues to be displayed, so when a player tries to leave the seat, It is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the player has finished the game. Thereby, it can reduce that a player suffers a disadvantage.

  In addition, the fact that the number of acquired numbers (for example, 8) has been acquired is continuously displayed by the display of the acquired number of sheets when the player finishes the game (leaves the seat by performing a checkout process). , Because it is confused with other players and people involved in the hall that the player has not finished playing (even if the player is still trying to play) Yes.

Due to the processing of step S120 of FIG. 40 and steps S421 and S422 of FIG. 49, a timer of about 60 seconds is set at the start of the game, and when the 60 seconds have elapsed from the start of the game, the display contents of the acquisition number display LED 72 are cleared. Do (set to “00”).
As a result, for example, during the rotation of the reels 31 or when the winning combination is not won when the reels 31 are stopped (regardless of whether or not the winning combination is won), “00” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 72. State. For example, when the bell 01 wins when all the reels 31 are stopped (during a normal game), the display of the acquisition number display LED 72 changes from “00” to “08”.

In addition, in the addition of one medal (MS_MEDAL_INC) in FIG. 47, the display of the acquired number is cleared in step S175. Display of the acquired number of times is cleared.
Since the above control is an example, for example, nothing may be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 during rotation of the reels 31, when a winning combination is not made when all the reels 31 are stopped, or when a medal is inserted. Good.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is provided control for changing the power consumption in the sub state based on the operation of the operation switch when the setting key switch 52 is turned off in step S416.
Specifically, it has a “normal mode” and a “power saving (economy) mode”, and depending on these modes, the type of lighting of the effect lamp 21 during the game standby or the game, a decrease in luminance, and the normal Control is performed such that the volume of the sound is reduced.
In the present embodiment, when the setting key switch 52 is turned off, the normal mode is set to the power saving mode by turning the left and right stop switches 42 on and off.
Specifically, it is as follows.
1) Left stop switch 42 off, right stop switch 42 off: no mode transition 2) Left stop switch 42 on, right stop switch 42 off: transition to normal mode 3) Left stop switch 42 off, right stop switch 42 on: saving Transition to power mode 4) Left stop switch 42 on, right stop switch 42 on: no mode transition

Information processing is as follows.
If it is determined in step S416 that the setting key switch 52 is off, the level data of the input port 0 is acquired. Then, the level data of the input port 0 is stored in the A register.
Next, an AND (logical product) operation is performed on the level data (data stored in the A register) of the input port 0 and “10100000”, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
The D5 bit of the input port 0 is a signal of the left stop switch 42, and the D7 bit is a signal of the right stop switch 42. Therefore, by performing an AND operation on the level data of the input port 0 and “10100000”, it is possible to create data indicating whether the left or right stop switch 42 is on.

  Next, the operation result is shifted to the right by one digit so that the data stored in the A register becomes the second control command data. For example, when the A register value is “10100000” (when the left and right stop switches 42 are ON), “01010000” is obtained. When the A register value is “10000000” (when the right stop switch 42 is on), the value is “01000000”. Furthermore, when the A register value is “00000000” (when the left and right stop switches 42 are off), it remains “00000000”.

  In this embodiment, the control command transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80 includes the first control command and the second control command, and the sub control board 80 receives the control. It is determined whether the command is the first control command or the second control command depending on whether the most significant bit of the command is “1” or “0”. In the present embodiment, the control command with the most significant bit “1” is the first control command, and the control command with the most significant bit “0” is the second control command. Therefore, in order to set the most significant bit to “0”, the bit value is shifted to the right by one digit.

In the output request set at the end of setting value display in step S418, the A register value is stored in the E register. In the present embodiment, of the control commands at the end of setting value display, the first control command is stored in the D register, and its value is “100001111” (8F (H)). Further, the second control command (E register value) is determined according to whether the left and right stop switches 42 are turned on or off.
1) 01000000 (40 (H)) (when the right stop switch 42 is on)
2) 00010000 (10 (H)) (when left stop switch 42 is on)
3) 01010000 (50 (H)) (when the left and right stop switches 42 are on)
4) 00000000 (0 (H)) (Left and right stop switch 42 off)
Either.

Then, in the control command set 1 in step S419, the D register value is set as the first control command data, and the E register value is set as the second control command data.
Then, when these data are transmitted to the sub-control board 80, the sub-control board 80 has a predetermined pattern in accordance with whether it is the normal mode or the power saving mode. Control the lighting of.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the medal management process (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in step S56 of FIG.
In FIG. 50, in step S211, the main control board 60 detects whether or not the blocker signal is on. When the blocker signal is on, the process proceeds to step S212, and when the blocker signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S213. Here, “the blocker signal is ON” corresponds to the case where a medal passage is formed by the blocker 47. In the present embodiment, it is detected whether or not the D2-bit data of the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) is on.

  In step S212, the main control board 60 detects whether or not the data relating to the making sensor signal is ON. Here, it is determined whether either the D1 or D2 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1”. If it is determined that the data related to the insertion sensor signal is ON, it means that the medal has been inserted, so the process proceeds to step S222 (MS_INSERT_CHK: FIG. 51), and a check process for medal maintenance is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not ON, the process proceeds to step S213.

In step S213, a request for checking whether or not it is possible to accept the betting operation and the settlement operation of the 1-bet switch 40a and the 3-bet switch 40b is set. Then, in the next step S214, it is checked whether or not these operations can be accepted.
Next, proceeding to step S215, the main control board 60 determines whether or not operation acceptance is possible. When it is determined that it is possible, the process proceeds to step S216. When it is determined that it is not possible, the process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

It is possible to determine whether or not the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 43 can be accepted before performing the betting process or the settlement process by the processes in the above steps S213 to S215. Only when the current state is a negative state, the process proceeds to the betting process or the settlement process. For example, the input port 0 level data and the input port 0 rising data are read by the processing of steps S213 to S215, and the operation can be accepted when the input port 0 level data and the input port 0 rising data do not match. Judge that is not.
In step S216, confirmation requests for the bet switch signal and the settlement switch signal are set. Here, input port 0 rising data (_PT_IN0_UP) is read.

In the next step S217, based on the confirmation in step S216, it is determined whether any one of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, or the settlement switch 43 has risen. In this determination, it is determined whether the D0, D1, and D2 bits are “1” in the input port 0 rising data read in step S213.
Specifically, for example, the read input port 0 rising data and “00000111” (definition data) are ANDed to clear the D3 to D7 bits. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculation result is “0”.
When the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no rising edge of any signal (that is, it is determined that none of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, and the settlement switch 43 has an operation change), The process according to this flowchart is terminated and the process returns to the main process.

  When it is determined in step S217 that the calculation result is not “0”, that is, when it is determined that there is a rise of any signal, the process proceeds to step S218. In step S218, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This process is a process for setting the D0 bit of the above-described medal management flag to “0”. When the D0 bit of the medal management flag is “0”, the game start LED 73d is turned off to indicate that the start switch 41 is not valid (invalid even if operated). On the other hand, when the D0 bit of the medal management flag is “1”, the game start LED 73d is lit to indicate that the start switch 41 is valid. Note that the actual output of turning on / off the game start LED 73d is executed in an interrupt process (step S606 in FIG. 64).

Therefore, when one of the signals of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b, or the settlement switch 43 is changed, the medal management flag data is used to notify that the start switch 41 is not permitted to be accepted. Is updated, a process based on the operation of the 1-bet switch 40a, the 3-bet switch 40b or the settlement switch 43 (the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET) or the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) in FIG. 50) is executed.
The process based on the start switch 41 (for example, the role lottery process) is performed in the main process, and the settlement process and the stored bet process are also performed in the main process. For example, the process based on the start switch 41 during the settlement process Is configured not to run.

Next, proceeding to step S219, the main control board 60 sets a data confirmation request related to the settlement switch 43 signal. The processing here is processing for checking whether the D0 bit of the input port 0 rising data is “0” or “1”, for example.
Then, in the next step S220, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a rise of the settlement switch 43 signal based on the confirmation in step S219. For example, when the D0 bit is “0”, it is determined that there is no rising data related to the adjustment switch 43 signal. When the D0 bit is “1”, the processing related to the adjustment switch 43 signal is determined. Judge that it has data.

  If it is determined that there is a rising edge of the settlement switch 43 signal, the process proceeds to step S221, and the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET: FIG. 57) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no rising of the settlement switch signal, it means that there is a rising of the bet switch signal, so the process proceeds to step S223, and the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN: FIG. 55) is executed.

In the above-described medal management process, it is determined in step S212 whether or not the data related to the insertion sensor signal is on. If it is on, the process proceeds to a care medal check, and if it is not on, the bet switch 40 signal Alternatively, it is determined whether or not the data relating to the settlement switch 43 signal is ON.
Therefore, since the physical medal insertion is preferentially checked over the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 43, the swallowing of medals can be prevented.

  Here, “the physical medal insertion is preferentially checked over the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 43” is when the steps S53 to S58 in FIG. In the ON state, the data of the RWM 61 related to each input port is updated by the interrupt processing, either the D1 or D2 bit of the input port 2 level data is “1”, and the input port 0 rising data D0, D1 Alternatively, when either the D2 bit is “1”, the “procedure medal check (step S222)” is easier to execute than the “payment process (step S221)” or the “reserved bet process (step S223)”. Refers to program processing.

In step S220, the rising data of the settlement switch 43 is confirmed, and execution of the subsequent process (settlement process or bet process) is determined.
One reason for this is that in the present embodiment, two switches, a 1-bet switch 40a and a 3-bet switch 40b, are provided as switches for executing the stored bet process, whereas switches for executing the settlement process are provided. Only one of the settlement switches 43 is provided. Therefore, it is possible to determine the settlement process or the stored bet process only by determining whether or not the D0 bit (specific bit) of the input port 0 rising data is ON. In other words, the processing is simplified and the program capacity is reduced rather than determining that “D1 bit or D2 bit is on?”.

51 and 52 are flowcharts showing the check process (MS_INSERT_CHK) at the time of medal care in step S222 of FIG. FIG. 52 is a flowchart subsequent to FIG.
In FIG. 51, in step S231, the main control board 60 clears the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 (D0 bit of the medal management flag as described above).
Next, proceeding to step S232, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the closing sensor 1 (48a) signal is ON.

  When the data related to the input sensor 1 signal is on, the process proceeds to step S233, and when the data is not on (when the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is on), the process proceeds to step S238. In step S233, the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 (the number of interruptions is 64, about 143 ms) is set. Here, when a medal is detected by the insertion sensor 1, the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned on. However, when the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed, the medal Since clogging or the like is considered, the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 is measured.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S234, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is OFF in the same manner as in step S232. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is OFF, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.

  Here, after the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is turned on in step S232, it is rare that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is determined to be off in step S234. Data relating to the insertion sensor 1 signal may be temporarily turned on due to, for example, a medal rampage, and it may be detected in step S232. Even if data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is temporarily turned on due to noise or a medal in the medal selector 45, the process of step S234 prevents the process from proceeding to step S235 and subsequent steps. That is, even if such a phenomenon occurs, it is determined that there is an error, and error notification is not performed, so that the game can proceed smoothly.

  If it is determined in step S234 that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S235. In step S235, it is determined whether data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is ON. When it is determined that the data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is on, the process proceeds to step S240, and when it is determined that the data is not on, the process proceeds to step S236.

In step S236, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the closing sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S237, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S238.
In step S237, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 1 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S233 has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S234.

  When it is determined in step S232 that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not on, or in step S236, it is determined that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 signal is not on and the process proceeds to step S238, the main control board 60 Set display request for illegal passing error. This illegal medal passing error is referred to as “CP error” in the present embodiment, and a control process for displaying “CP” on the acquired number display LED 72 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S239 to shift to error display (FIG. 61; MS_ERROR_DSP).

  Further, in step S235, it is determined that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is ON, and when the process proceeds to step S240, the main control board 60 sets the passage check time of the input sensor 2 (the number of interruptions is about 143 ms). set. Next, proceeding to step S241, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the closing sensor 2 signal is ON. When the data relating to the input sensor 2 signal is on, the process proceeds to step S245, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to step S242. In step S242, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data relating to the input sensors 1 and 2 is ON. When it is on, the process proceeds to step S243, and when it is not on, the process proceeds to step S238.

  In step S243, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 2 has elapsed. That is, it is determined whether or not the time set in step S240 has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S244. In step S244, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 1 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 1 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S241.

  In step S241, it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is ON. When the process proceeds to step S245, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the input sensor 1 and 2 signals is OFF. When it is determined that the data related to the input sensors 1 and 2 is OFF, the process proceeds to step S249 in FIG. 52, and when it is determined that the data is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S246. In step S246, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the closing sensor 2 signal is ON.

  When it is determined that the data related to the input sensor 2 signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S238, and when it is determined that the data is on, the process proceeds to step S247. In step S247, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the passage check time of the making sensor 2 has elapsed. When it is determined that the passage check time of the closing sensor 2 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S248, and when it is determined that the passage check time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S245.

  In step S248, a medal retention error display request is set. The medal retention error means that the data related to the insertion sensor 1 or 2 signal is turned on even after the passage check time has elapsed, and the medal is retained in the medal passage. It is. This medal retention error is referred to as a “CE error” in the present embodiment, and a control process for displaying “CE” on the acquired number display LED 72 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S239 to shift to error display.

  If it is determined in step S245 that the data related to the insertion sensors 1 and 2 is OFF and the process proceeds to step S249 in FIG. 52, the main control board 60 sets a display request for an abnormal medal insertion error. Here, the medal abnormal insertion error is an error indicating that there is a passage abnormality between the passage sensor 46 and the insertion sensors 1 and 2. The medal abnormal insertion error is referred to as “C1 error” in the present embodiment, and when this medal abnormal insertion error occurs, a control process of displaying “C1” on the acquired number display LED 72 is executed.

  In step S250, the main control board 60 subtracts “1” from the value of the input monitoring counter. Here, as described above, the insertion monitoring counter is a counter that is set to “+1” when the passage sensor 46 detects a medal and is set to “0” when the insertion sensors 1 and 2 detect a medal. That is, when normal, “+1” and “0” are repeated.

  Next, proceeding to step S251, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the value of the input monitoring counter is in the range of “0” to “3”. When it is determined that it is within the range, the process proceeds to step S252. When it is determined that it is not within the range, the process proceeds to step S239 in FIG.

For example, the value of the counter is “−1” when the input sensors 1 and 2 pass without passing through the passage sensor 46.
Further, the value of the counter becomes “+4” when the medal that has passed the passage sensor 46 stays before passing the insertion sensors 1 and 2.

In step S252, the medal limit number is set (MS_MMAX_SET: FIG. 48). In step S253, a bet medal (the number of medals currently bet) is read (S_PLAYM_READ: FIG. 44).
In the next step S254, the stored number is read (S_CREDIT_READ: FIG. 45).

Next, proceeding to step S255, the main control board 60 calculates the total number of medals and the number of reserved bets at the present time. In the next step S256, it is determined whether or not subsequent medal insertion is impossible after the medal insertion is validated. In this embodiment,
“Current bet number” + “Current stored number” −49 = “Medal limit number”
Is calculated whether or not
Here, the “current bet number” indicates the number of medals before adding the medals currently passed. For example, when the current bet number is “2” and the current storage number is “50”, the medal limit number is “3”, and this formula is satisfied. It is determined that subsequent medals cannot be inserted.

If it is determined that it cannot be inserted, the process proceeds to step S257 to execute processing for turning off the blocker 47 (MS_BLOCKER_OFF: FIG. 53). Then, the process proceeds to step S258. On the other hand, when it is determined that the input is possible, step S257 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S258.
When the blocker signal is on, a medal passage that passes through the insertion sensors 1 and 2 is formed. When the blocker signal is off, a medal passage that returns the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 44 from the payout port 14 is formed. Form.

In the next step S258, the main control board 60 sets an output request for medal maintenance, and in the next step S259, the control command set 1 is executed.
In the next step S260, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the bet number of medals is a limit number (upper limit number) at the present time. When it is determined that the number of bets is a limit value, the process proceeds to step S262, and a storage (credit) number addition process (MS_CREDIT_ADD: FIG. 54) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the bet number is not the limit number, the process proceeds to step S261, and bet addition processing for one medal is performed (MS_MEDAL_INC: FIG. 47).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing blocker-off processing (MS_BLOCKER_OFF). As described above, after the medal care becomes effective, when the medal care becomes impossible (cannot be accepted), the blocker 47 is turned off, and the medal that has been maintained from the medal insertion slot 44 is discharged. Control is performed to form a medal passage to be returned from 14.

  First, in step S271, the main control board 60 performs a blocker signal confirmation process. Here, the blocker signal stored in the RWM 61 and the D6 bit (blocker signal data) of the hopper motor drive signal data are confirmed.

  In step S272, the main control board 60 determines whether the blocker signal is off (the blocker signal data is “0”). When it is determined that it is not off, the process proceeds to step S273, and when it is determined that it is off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, when the blocker 47 is already off, the process according to this flowchart is terminated without proceeding with the process for turning off the blocker 47.

  When it is determined in step S272 that the blocker signal is not OFF and the process proceeds to step S273, the main control board 60 prohibits interruption from this point. As described above, during the execution of the main process (M_MAIN), one timer interrupt process is entered every 2.235 ms. If there is a description of “interrupt disabled” as in step S273, the interrupt is disabled. Control is made so that interrupts are not permitted until is released.

In the next step S274, the main control board 60 performs processing for turning off the blocker signal. This process is a process for setting the D6 bit of the output port 3 to “0”. Specifically, by setting the blocker signal data (D6 bit) to “0”, the D6 bit of the output port 3 becomes “0” at the next interrupt processing. In the next step S275, a process for turning off the blocker signal state is performed. This processing is processing for setting the D2 bit of the medal management flag to “0”.
Then, the process proceeds to step S276, and the main control board 60 sets an abnormal input detection time of the making sensor 2.

Here, in this embodiment, after the blocker 47 is turned on (from medal passage) to off (medal return), even if the on signal of the insertion sensor 2 is detected before the predetermined time elapses, the abnormality of the insertion sensor 2 is detected. Although it is not determined as an input, when an on signal of the closing sensor 2 is detected after a predetermined time has elapsed, it is determined that the closing sensor 2 is in an abnormal input. Specifically, the medal may pass through the insertion sensors 48a (1) and 48b (2) immediately after the blocker 47 is physically turned off or in the middle of being turned off. This is to prevent detection as an error (considering normal passage). For this reason, the detection time (500.64 ms) of the input sensor abnormality input is set at the timing of step S276.
When the detection time of the input sensor abnormality input is set in step S276, the process proceeds to step S277, where the interrupt inhibition set in step S273 is canceled, that is, the interrupt is permitted. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

In the above process, no interruption is generated between the processes of steps S274 to S276, as in the blocker-on process.
In other words, if an interrupt occurs between the process of turning off the blocker signal and the process of turning off the blocker status signal, one of them is turned off and the other is turned on. Interrupt processing is prohibited to update both values at once.

In addition, after the blocker signal is turned off in step S274 and the input sensor 2 abnormal input detection start time is set in step S276, the interrupt is permitted in step S277 for the following reason.
If the interrupt process is executed after the blocker signal is turned off in step S274 and before the process of step S276 is executed, the input port read process is executed in step S607 of FIG. Proceeding to the check process, an error is detected when the insertion sensor 2 detects a medal. Therefore, interrupt processing is permitted in step S277 after execution of the processing in step S276.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the addition of one stored sheet (MS_CREDIT_ADD) in step S262 of FIG.
In step S278, the stored number is read (S_CREDIT_READ; FIG. 45). That is, the stored number display data is read from the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” and stored in the A register.
In the next step S279, a process of adding “1” to the number of stored sheets (“+1”) is performed. This process is a process of adding “1” to the A register value. In the next step S280, the stored number data is saved, that is, the calculated A register value is stored in the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. In step S280, a value obtained by converting the stored number data into decimal number data is stored as stored number display data.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) in step S223 of FIG.
First, in step S281, the main control board 60 determines whether the medal limit flag is on (“1”) by reading the D7 bit of the medal management flag. When the medal limit flag is on, it means that the number of bets is already the maximum number, so the betting process according to this flowchart is terminated. That is, even if the operation of the bet switch 40 is detected in step S220 in FIG. 50 and the process proceeds to the “MS_BET_IN” process, the stored bet process is not performed if the bet number is already the maximum number.

If it is determined in step S281 that the medal limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S282, where “1” is set as the requested number of bets (insertion). In this process, “1” is stored in the B register. Therefore,
B register value = 1
It becomes.
In step S283, it is determined whether or not the D1 bit of the input port 0 rising data is “1”, that is, whether or not the 1-bet switch 40a has been operated. When it is determined that the 1-bet switch 40a has been operated, the process proceeds to step S288, and when it is determined that the 1-bet switch 40a has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S284.
Since the operation of any of the bet switches 40 is detected in the processing before step S283 (steps S217 and S220 in FIG. 50), when “No” is determined in step S283, the 3-bet switch 40b. Means that has been operated.

In step S284, the medal limit number (for example, three in the normal game) is set (MS_MMAX_SET; FIG. 48). Here, the medal limit number is stored in the C register. For example, when it ’s a regular game,
C register value = 3
It becomes.
In the next step S285, a (bet) medal reading process is performed (S_PLAYM_READ; FIG. 44). Therefore, as described above, the value of medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is read, and the read bet medal number data is stored in the A register. Further, the address “F06D” of the medal bet number data is stored in the HL register. This
HL register value = F06D
It becomes.

  In step S286, the requested bet number is set. In this process, first, the C register value (medal limit number) is stored in the A register. For example, when the C register value is “3” as described above, the A register value = “3”. Further, the address data (medal bet number data) indicated by the HL register is subtracted from the A register value (indicating the medal limit number at this time), and the result is stored in the A register. For example, when the A register value (medal limit number) is “3” and the medal bet number data (number already bet) is “1”, the A register value is “3-1 = 2”. 2 ”. This value is the number of medals newly added as a bet.

In step S287, a requested bet number correction process is performed. That is, the value calculated in step S286 is set as the requested bet number. Specifically, a process of storing the A register value in the B register is executed.
In step S282 described above, the requested bet number is set to “1” (B register value = “1”) as an initial value, but remains unchanged when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated, Instead of “1” set in S282, the value calculated in step S286 is reset.

Next, the process proceeds to step S288, and the current number of stored sheets is read (FIG. 45; S_CREDIT_READ). That is, the value of “_NB_CREDIT_LED” is read and the read data is stored in the A register.
In the next step S289, the main control board 60 determines whether or not medals are stored. When the A register value stored in step S288 is “0”, it is determined that no medal is stored, and when the A register value is not “0”, it is determined that there is a medal storage.
When it is determined that no medal is stored, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined that a medal is stored, the process proceeds to step S290.

  In step S290, it is determined whether or not there is rising data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal (whether or not the D1 bit of the input port 0 rising data is “1”). When it is determined that the rising data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal is included, the process proceeds to step S291. When it is determined that the rising data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal is not included, the process skips step S291 and proceeds to step S292.

  In step S291, the rising data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal is cleared. That is, a process of setting the D1 bit of the input port 0 rising data (_PT_IN0_UP) to “0” is executed. In this way, if there is a stored medal in step S289, the presence / absence of rising data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal is determined. If there is rising data, the bet processing is executed after clearing the data.

As described above, the rising data of the input ports 0 to 2 is generated and stored by the interrupt process.
On the other hand, when executing the bet process, a process of clearing the rising data relating to the 1-bet switch 40a generated and stored by the interrupt process in the main process is executed.
If the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 40a is not cleared, the rising data “1” related to the 1-bet switch 40a is maintained until the interrupt process is executed again.

In this case, before the next interrupt process is executed and the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 40a is updated to “0”, the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) in FIG. 50 changes to “Yes” in step S217, and FIG. The stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) is executed again, and one bet process is executed again based on the rise data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal being “1”. Therefore, for example, when the player operates the 1-bet switch 40a and tries to bet one medal, there is a possibility that two or three medals will be bet successively.
In order to avoid such an inconvenience, when there is a medal storage, the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 40a is cleared before the betting process is started.

In the present embodiment, only the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 40a is cleared, and when the 3-bet switch 40b is operated, the process of clearing the rising data related to the 3-bet switch 40b is not executed.
When three bets have been reserved based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b, a medal limit flag is set in the addition of one medal in step S296 (step S182 in FIG. 47).
As a result, as described above, the rising data “1” of the 3-bet switch 40b signal is maintained until the next interrupt processing is executed, and “Yes” in step S217 from the medal management (MS_MEDAL_CHK) of FIG. Thus, when the stored bet process (MS_BET_IN) of FIG. 55 is executed again, “Yes” is set in step S281, and the stored bet process is not executed.

For example, when the bet number before the 3-bet switch 40b is operated is “0” and the stored number is “2”, the bet number is “2” based on the operation of the 3-bet switch 40b. . At this time, since the bet number is not yet the limit number, the medal limit flag does not become “1”.
In this state, if the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal is not cleared and the stored bet process is executed again before the next interrupt process is executed, “No” is set in step S281. However, since “No” is determined in the step S289, the processes after the step S290 are not executed.
Therefore, it is not always necessary to clear the rising data related to the 3-bet switch 40b (at least the rising data related to the 1-bet switch 40a may be cleared).

  However, if the rising data relating to the 3-bet switch 40b is left as “1”, the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal is “1” until the next interrupt process is executed. It is true that the storage bet process is executed (the process proceeds to the process of FIG. 55). Therefore, in order to avoid this, the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal may be cleared. When clearing the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal, the process of step S290 is replaced with “determination of whether or not the rising data of the 1-bet switch 40a signal is present”, and “rising of the 3-bet switch 40b signal” Data clear processing ”may be performed. The clearing process of the rising data of the 3-bet switch 40b signal is a process of setting the D2 bit of the input port 0 rising data (_PT_IN0_UP) to “0”.

In step S292, it is determined whether or not the number of medals stored (the number read in step S288) is equal to or greater than the requested bet number (the number set in step S282 or step S287). Specifically, a process of subtracting the B register value (requested bet number) from the A register value (medal storage number) is executed to determine whether or not the value is “0” or more.
If it is determined that the number of stored medals is equal to or greater than the requested number of bets, the process proceeds to step S294. If it is determined that the number of stored medals is not equal to or greater than the requested number of bets, the process proceeds to step S293.

  In step S293, the medal storage number is set. This process is a process for setting the total number of stored sheets to the number of added bets. That is, when “No” is determined in step S292, the stored number is less than the bet number. In this case, processing is performed in which the total stored number is the added bet number. Specifically, it is a process of storing the A register value in the B register. Then, the process proceeds to step S294.

As described above, when “Yes” is determined in Step S283 (when the 1-bet switch 40a is operated), the requested bet number “1” set in Step S282 is set as the bet addition number, and the value is stored in the B register ( B register value = “00000001”).
On the other hand, in step S287, for example, “3” is set as the requested bet number, and if “Yes” in step S292, the requested bet number “3” is set as the bet addition number, and the value is stored in the B register. (B register value = “00000011”).
Also, although “3” is set as the requested bet number in step S287, when the stored number is “2”, “No” is set in step S292, and “2” is set as the bet addition number in step S293. The value is stored in the B register (B register value = “00000010”).
Thus, the bet addition number (requested number of bets) refers to the number actually bet based on the calculation result when the bet switch 40 is operated.

In step S294, an output request at the time of a storage bet is set. Specifically, “10 (H)” as control command data is stored in the D register, and the B register value is stored in the E register. Here, the D register value is a control command indicating that the stored bet is involved, and the E register value is a control command indicating the bet addition number.
In step S295, the control command set 1 is executed. This processing is processing for writing control command data (DE register value) in the control command buffer.
In the next step S296, one medal addition (bet) process is performed (FIG. 47; MS_MEDAL_INC). When this medal one piece addition process is executed, a process of adding “1” to the value of the medal met number data “_NB_PLAY_MEDAL” is performed.

Next, the process proceeds to step S297, and a process of subtracting one from the stored number is performed (MS_CREDIT_DEC: FIG. 56 described later). In the next step S298, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the requested number of bets has been completed. Here, “1” is subtracted from the B register value (requested number of bets), and it is determined whether or not the B register value after the subtraction is “0”. For example, when the B register value before adding one medal is “00000011” (3), the B register value is updated to “00000010” (2) by adding one medal.
When it is determined that the B register value after the calculation is “0”, it is determined that the bet of the requested number has been completed, and when it is determined that the B register value after the calculation is not “0”, the requested number of bets is determined. Is determined not to end.
If it is determined that the requested number of bets has been completed, the process proceeds to step S302. If it is determined that the bet has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S299.

In step S299, the blocker 47 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 53). In step S300, a standby time is set. In step S300, in order to set a waiting time of about 105 ms, “47” is set as the count value of the number of interrupts. In step S301, “1” is subtracted from the count value for each interrupt, and wait processing is executed until the count value becomes “0”. Then, after the end of the wait process, the process returns to step S296.
In the above process, the blocker 47 is turned off in step S299 because a wait process is provided when the medal one-piece addition process is repeated. This is to avoid this.

As described above, when two or more bets are bet, the medal one-piece addition process (step S296) and the wait process in step S301 are repeated.
If the wait process is provided as described above, for example, when three bets are bet based on the 3-bet switch 40b, three bets are bet in an instant (the input display LEDs 73e to 73g are turned on in an instant). Can be eliminated.

If it is determined in step S298 that the requested number of bets has been completed and the process proceeds to step S302, the blocker is turned on (FIG. 46). And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
As a result, after the storage betting process is completed, the blocker 47 is turned on, so that medals can be maintained.

In the process of FIG. 55, after clearing the rising signal related to the 1-bet switch 40a, the medal 1-sheet addition process is repeated until the bet-added number becomes “0”, but these processes may be reversed. .
Specifically, after the medal one-piece addition process is repeated until the bet addition number becomes “0”, the rising data clear process in step S291 may be executed before or after the blocker is turned on in step S302.
In this embodiment, before the next bet process (again, the process of FIG. 55) is executed, the rising data of the bet switch 40 (particularly, the 1 bet switch 40a) may be cleared.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing processing (MS_CREDIT_DEC) for subtracting one from the number of stored images in step S297 in FIG.
In step S305, the stored number is read (FIG. 45; S_CREDIT_READ). That is, the stored number display data is read from the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED” and stored in the A register.
In the next step S306, a process of subtracting “1” from the stored number (“−1”) is performed. This process is the reverse of step S279 in FIG. 54, and “1” is subtracted from the A register value. In the next step S307, the stored number data is saved, that is, the calculated A register value is stored in the stored number display data “_NB_CREDIT_LED”. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished. In step S307, similarly to step S280, a value obtained by converting the stored number data into decimal number data is stored as stored number display data.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the settlement process (MS_MEDAL_RET) in step S221 of FIG.
First, in step S311, the main control board 60 performs a process of reading the number of stored sheets (FIG. 45; S_CREDIT_READ). In the next step S312, the main control board 60 performs a (bet) medal reading process (FIG. 44; S_PLAYM_READ).

Next, proceeding to step S313, the main control board 60 checks the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION). Subsequently, in step S314, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the game is in a replay operation (whether or not the replay operation state flag is on).
If it is not during the replay operation in step S314, the process proceeds to step S316. If it is during the replay operation, the process proceeds to step S315.

In step S315, the bet number that can be settled is cleared. This process is a process of setting the bet number read in step S312 to “0” during the replay operation.
Note that, as shown in this flowchart, even when the automatic bet is obtained by the replay operation, the stored medals can be settled while the automatic bet is maintained.

In the next step S316, the main control board 60 determines whether there are medals that can be settled. In this process, the stored (credit) number read in step S311 and the bet number read in step S312 are "ORed" to determine whether there are any medals that can be settled. Note that both the stored number read in step S311 and the bet number read in step S312 (or the bet number processed in step S315) are both stored in the register as described above. Here, in the case of the replay operation, since the bet medal number that can be settled in step S315 is set to “0” (clear), “Yes” is set only when there is a reserve number.
If it is determined in step S316 that there are medals that can be settled, the process proceeds to step S317 and subsequent steps. If it is determined that there are no medals that can be settled, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S317, processing for turning off the blocker 47 (FIG. 53; MS_BLOCKER_OFF) is performed.
Next, proceeding to step S318, the main CPU 62 sets an output request at the start of settlement, and executes the control command set 1 at the next step S319.
The processing of the next step S320 and step S321 is the same as the processing of step S313 and step S314 described above.

In step S321, when it is determined that the replay operation is being performed, the process proceeds to step S324. When it is determined that the replay operation is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S322.
In step S322, a medal (the number of medals currently bet) is read (S_PLAYM_READ) (same as step S312).

Next, proceeding to step S323, the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a bet medal. If it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S327 and subsequent steps. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S324 and subsequent steps.
Here, when there is a bet medal, the betting medal settlement process is performed by performing the processing from step S327 onward. On the other hand, when there is no bet medal, the process of step S324 and subsequent steps is performed to perform the settlement process for the stored medal, that is, the credited medal.
Therefore, when there are both bets and stored medals, the bet medals are settled first.

When the process proceeds from step S323 to step S324, the main control board 60 performs a process of lighting the settlement display LED 73c. In the present embodiment, the settlement display LED 73c is lit while the stored medal settlement process is being performed.
In step S324, the same process as step S146 described above is performed. Specifically, this is a process of turning on the D4 bit (“1” when the settlement process is being performed) in the medal management flag (_FL_MEDAL_STS) stored in the RWM 61.
Note that the process of actually turning on the adjustment display LED 73c is performed by the LED display control (step S606) in the interrupt process.

  In step S325, the stored medal settlement process (MS_CREDIT_RET) is performed (FIG. 58 described later). After the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S326, and the settlement display LED 73c turned on in step S324 is turned off. This process is a process opposite to step S324, and is a process for turning off ("0") the D4 bit ("1" when the settlement process is being performed) in the medal management flag. Then, the process proceeds to step S336.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S323 that there is a bet medal and the process proceeds to step S327, the main control board 60 performs a payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) for one medal (FIGS. 59 to 60 described later).

Next, proceeding to step S328, the main control board 60 executes a process of turning off any one of the LEDs (input display LEDs 73e to 73g) that display the input number.
For example, when three medals are bet at the present time, all three of the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are in a lighting state. Then, when the process proceeds to step S328 in this state, control is performed so that only the three-sheet insertion display LED 73g is turned off (the lighting of the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f is maintained).

Further, when the process proceeds to step S328 in a state where the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e and the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f are lit, only the two-sheet insertion display LED 73f is turned off (the lighting of the one-sheet insertion display LED 73e is maintained). To control.
Further, when the process proceeds to step S328 in a state where only the single-loading display LED 73e is lit, control is performed so that the single-loading display LED 73e is turned off (thus, the insertion display LEDs 73e to 73g are all turned off). To do.

In step S328, similarly to steps S176 to S178 described above, processing for updating the stored input display LED signal data is performed. As described above, the number-of-insertion-display LED signal data (_PT_MEDAL_LED)
Insertion number display LED signal data (when one sheet is inserted): 10000000
Insertion number display LED signal data (when 2 sheets are inserted): 11 million
Insertion number display LED signal data (when 3 sheets are inserted): 11100000
It has become.
Therefore, immediately before step S328, when the inserted number display LED signal data is “11100000” when three sheets are inserted, the calculation is performed so that it becomes the inserted number display LED signal data when two sheets are inserted. "
That is, by issuing an instruction to shift to the left, “11100000” → “11000000” (an instruction that is not a rotation type described above is used).

In the next step S329, a (bet) medal is read (S_PLAYM_READ; FIG. 44). In step S330, the medal number is subtracted. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the medal bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) stored in the RWM 61.
In the next step S331, an output request for displaying the number of medals is set. This process is a request to display the number of medals after subtracting one medal. In the next step S332, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1.
Further, in the next step S333, a (bet) medal is read (S_PLAYM_READ; FIG. 44). In step S333, the number of medals after subtraction of one is read.

  Then, the process proceeds to step S334, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a bet medal as in step S323. If it is determined that there is a bet medal, the process returns to step S327, and a payout process for one medal is performed in the same manner as described above. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S335, and the main control board 60 performs a process of clearing the medal limit flag (D7 bit of the medal management flag). Next, proceeding to step S336, the main control board 60 sets an output request at the end of payment. In the next step S337, the main control board 60 executes the control command set 1. Then, the process proceeds to step S338, and the process proceeds to a process of turning on the blocker 47 (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 46).

In the settlement process described above, in step S318 and step S319, control command data is set in order to transmit the start of settlement to the sub-control board 80.
In step S336 and step S337, control command data is set in order to transmit to the sub-control board 80 that the settlement has been completed.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the stored medal settlement process (MS_CREDIT_RET) in step S325 of FIG.
In FIG. 58, first, in step S341, the main CPU 62 performs a reading process (S_CREDIT_READ; FIG. 45) of the stored number at the present time. Next, the process proceeds to step S342, and the main control board 60 determines whether or not there is a stored medal, that is, a credit, based on the result read in step S341. When it is determined that there is a stored medal (zero flag is “0”), the process proceeds to step S343.

  In step S343, one medal payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) (FIGS. 59 to 60 described later) is performed from the stored medals. In step S334, a process of subtracting one from the number of stored medals (MS_CREDIT_DEC; FIG. 56) is performed. Thereafter, the process returns to step S341. That is, in the stored medal settlement, processing is executed until the stored medal becomes “0”. At this time, it is designed so that it takes about 100 ms when it is controlled so that one medal is normally paid out by the processing of FIGS. 59 to 60 described later. In other words, when one medal is paid out, the stored number display data is updated at an interval of about 100 ms, and an interrupt process is executed during this time, so that the display of the stored number display LED 71 is subtracted one by one. Is configured to be visible.

59 and 60 are flowcharts showing the payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) for one medal in step S327 of FIG. FIG. 60 is a flowchart following FIG.
In step S351 in FIG. 59, the main control board 60 sets an error not detected. That is, a state in which no error is detected in the initial state is set. In the next step S352, the main control board 60 sets a medal jam error display request.
The medal jam error is referred to as “HP error” in the present embodiment. When this medal jam error occurs, a process of displaying “HP” on the acquired number display LED 72 is executed.

  In step S353, the main control board 60 determines whether an error has been detected. If it is determined that an error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S354 to display an error (FIG. 61; MS_ERROR_DSP). Then, the process proceeds to step S355. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S353 that no error has been detected, the process proceeds to step S355.

  In step S355, the main control board 60 sets the control time of the medal payout device 35 (for example, 2686 interrupt, about 6000 ms). Here, the control time is started. In step S356, a process for driving the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, in the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data, by setting the D7 bit indicating the hopper motor drive signal data to “1”, the D7 bit of the output port 3 becomes “1” at the next interrupt processing. . Next, proceeding to step S357, the main control board 60 reads the control time after setting in step S355.

In the next step S358, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the control time has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S361, and when it is determined that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S359.
In step S361, a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36 is performed. Specifically, by setting the above-described hopper motor drive signal data to “0”, the D7 bit of the output port 3 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. In the next step S362, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 (for example, 27 interrupts, about 60 ms) is set, and the measurement of the detection time is started. In step S363, the main control board 60 determines whether data relating to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S355, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S364.

In step S364, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has passed a predetermined time. When it is determined that the predetermined time has passed, that is, when the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is not ON and the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has passed the predetermined time, the medal has not been paid out. In step S365, the main control board 60 sets a medal empty error display request. The medal empty error is referred to as “HE error” in this embodiment, and when this medal empty error occurs, a process of displaying “HE” on the acquired number display LED 72 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S353.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S364 that the detection time of the payout sensor 1 has not passed the predetermined time, the process returns to step S363.

  If it is determined in step S358 that the control time has not passed the predetermined time and the process proceeds to step S359, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S360, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process returns to step S357.

In step S360, the detection time of the payout sensor 1 is set. This process is the same as step S362. Next, proceeding to step S366, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. When it is determined that a clogged medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S352, and when it is determined that no medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S367.
In step S367, the main control board 60 determines whether the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is ON. When it is determined that it is on, the process proceeds to step S368, and when it is determined that it is not on, the process proceeds to step S357.

In step S368, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensors 1 and 2 is ON. When it is determined that both are on, the process proceeds to step S369, and when it is determined that both are not on, the process returns to step S366.
In step S369, the main control board 60 sets the detection time of the payout sensor 2. Next, proceeding to step S370 of FIG. 60, the main control board 60 determines whether or not a medal jam has been detected. When it is determined that a clogged medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S352, and when it is determined that no medal is detected, the process proceeds to step S371.

In step S371, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 2 signal is OFF. When it is determined that the data related to the payout sensor 2 signal is not OFF, the process returns to step S370, and when it is determined that the data is OFF, the process proceeds to step S372.
In step S372, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout is invalid. If it is determined to be invalid, the process proceeds to step S357. If it is determined not to be invalid, the process proceeds to step S373. In step S373, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the data related to the payout sensor 1 signal is OFF. When it is determined that it is off, the process proceeds to step S374, and when it is determined that it is not off, the process returns to step S370.

  In step S374, the remaining payout number (count value) is “−1” (“1” is subtracted). Next, proceeding to step S375, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the medal payout has been completed. When it is determined that the medal payout has been completed, the process proceeds to step S376, and when it is determined that the medal has not been completed, this flowchart is ended. In step S376, the main control board 60 performs a process for turning off the drive signal of the hopper motor 36. Specifically, by setting the above-described hopper motor drive signal data to “0”, the D7 bit of the output port 3 becomes “0” during the next interrupt processing. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing error display processing (MS_ERROR_DSP). The error display process of FIG. 61 is a process when a recoverable error occurs, and is restored by turning on the reset switch 53 or the like. The error when the processing of FIG. 61 is executed is an error that can be solved by a hall related person (administrator) of the slot machine 10 and is not likely to be a serious error. Therefore, processing such as interrupt prohibition is performed. Absent.
On the other hand, the process of FIG. 61 is not performed at the time of the “unrecoverable error” described above. When an unrecoverable error occurs, the above-described processing of FIG. 38 is performed (interrupt is prohibited).

In FIG. 61, first, in step S381, the error number generated this time is stored. Specifically, the value of a predetermined register (for example, E register) before the occurrence of an error is stored in a predetermined area (error number data) of the RWM 61. Various errors are displayed in FIG. 68 described later.
The recoverable errors are not limited to the errors mentioned in this embodiment, and there are other types, but the description is omitted in this embodiment.

In the next step S382, the states of the blocker (45) signal and the hopper motor (36) drive signal before the error occurs are saved (stored). Specifically, the blocker signal data and the hopper motor drive signal data (“0” or “1”) described above are stored in a predetermined register (for example, C register).
In step S383, the hopper motor (36) drive signal is turned off. Specifically, the hopper motor drive signal data is set to “0”. Thus, when the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the driving is stopped from the next interrupt process.

  In the next step S384, the blocker 47 is turned off (MS_BLOCKER_OFF; FIG. 53). In the next step S385, the acceptance permission flag of the start switch 41 is cleared. This process is a process for turning off the D0 bit of the medal management flag.

Next, the process proceeds to step S386, and the display of the acquired number is saved. This process is for temporarily saving (storing) the number currently displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 and displaying it again after removing the error factor. Specifically, the acquired number display data stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61 is stored in a predetermined register (for example, B register).
In the next step S387, processing for displaying error information on the acquisition number display LED 72 is performed. Specifically, the value of the D register stored before FIG. 61 is executed is stored. For example, if the stored error is a CP error in step S381, the acquired number display data value for displaying “CP” on the acquired number display LED 72 is stored.
The LED display of the error information is performed by an interrupt process (step S606) described later.

  In step S388, an output request at the start of error display is set, and in step S389, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, “01” indicating the start of error display is stored in the D register, and error number data of the RWM 61 in which the error number is stored in the E register (“05” in the case of a CP error; see FIG. 68). ) Is memorized. In steps S388 to S389, a control command (command to be transmitted to the first sub control means 80) for starting the error display is set.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S390, and it continues to detect whether or not the reset switch 53 has risen (operated). This process is performed by determining whether or not the rising signal of the D4 bit of the input port 1 is turned on. When it is determined that the reset switch 53 has risen, the process proceeds to step S391, and the rise data of the reset switch signal is cleared. In step S392, the full detection signal inspection data is set. This process is a process of setting inspection data for determining whether or not an error relating to the full sensor 38 has occurred (whether or not the sub tank 35b is full of medals).

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S393 to determine whether or not a full error has occurred. If it is determined that there is a full error, the process proceeds to step S397. If it is determined that there is no full error, the process proceeds to step S394.
In step S394, the inspection data of the payout sensors 37a and 37b are set. This process is a process of setting inspection data for determining whether or not an abnormality relating to the payout sensors 37a and 37b has been detected.

In step S395, it is determined whether the error is related to the payout sensors 37a and 37b. When it is determined that the error is related to the payout sensors 37a and 37b, the process proceeds to step S397. When it is determined that the error is not the error, the process proceeds to step S396.
In step S396, inspection data of the making sensors 48a and 48b and the passage sensor 46 are set. This process is a process of setting inspection data for determining whether or not there is an abnormality related to these sensors.

Then, the process proceeds to step S397, and an error check is performed based on the inspection data set in step S392, step S394, or step S396.
Next, proceeding to step S398, based on the error check result of step S397, it is determined whether or not the error factor has been removed. When it is determined that it has been removed, the process proceeds to step S399, and when it is determined that it has not been removed, the process returns to step S390. In step S399, the error number data stored in the RWM 61 in step S381 is cleared. In step S400, the acquired number saved in step S386 (temporarily stored in the B register) is returned to the acquired number display data, which is a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61. Therefore, the display content of the acquisition number display LED 72 is returned to before the occurrence of the error by the interrupt processing executed after the processing.

  In step S401, an output request at the end of error display is set, and in step S402, control command set 1 is executed. In steps S401 to S402, a control command (command to be transmitted to the first sub-control means 80) to end the error display is set.

  In the next step S403, a process for returning to the state before saving in step S382 is performed. Therefore, the state of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal before the error occurrence stored in step S382 is read. Specifically, the process is restored based on the value of the predetermined register (for example, C register) saved in step S382. In step S404, the hopper motor drive signal data before the occurrence of the error is updated based on the value of a predetermined register (for example, C register). In the next step S405, based on the value of a predetermined register (for example, C register), it is determined whether or not the value of the blocker signal data before the occurrence of the error is “1”. When it is determined that the value is “1”, the process proceeds to step S406. When it is determined that the value is not “1”, the process according to the flowchart is terminated. In step S405, the blocker 47 is turned on (MS_BLOCKER_ON; FIG. 46), and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

  As described above, in the error processing of FIG. 61, a control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80 at the start of error display and at the end of error display. Therefore, while an error occurs, the sub control board 80 (substantially Specifically, the second sub control board 90) can perform notification regarding the error that has occurred (notification using the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23).

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing start switch acceptance (MS_START_CTL) in step S59 in FIG.
In step S431, the internal random number is stored in the MPU register (random number soft latch register). Here, the random number is latched (obtained), and it is step S60 in FIG. 39 to determine whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to the winning combination.
In the next step S432, the start switch acceptance permission flag is cleared. That is, the D0 bit of the medal management flag is cleared (set to “0”).
In step S433, the setting change permission flag is cleared. In this process, the D6 bit of the same medal management flag as in step S432 is set to “1”. As a result, the setting cannot be changed.

In the next step S434, the blocker 47 is turned off (FIG. 53). That is, after the start switch 41 is operated, control is performed so that a medal is not accepted. In the next step S435, reading of bet medals (S_PLAYM_READ) is executed (FIG. 44). The number of bet medals read here is stored in the A register. In the next step S436, the main control board 60 sets an output request for reel rotation disclosure. Here, “13 (H)” is set as the first control command value, and the A register value is set as the second control command.
In step S437, the bet medal number (A register value) read in step S435 is set in the E register.

In the next step S438, the control command set 1 is executed. This process is a process of storing the control command set in step S436 in a buffer.
Next, proceeding to step S439, the main control board 60 determines whether or not the set value stored in the RWM 61 is within the normal range (1 to 6). When it is determined that it is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S440, and when it is determined that it is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S445, and an unrecoverable error process (E6 error) is executed.

  In step S440, a bet medal is read (S_PLAYM_READ) (FIG. 44). Then, the read bet medal number is stored in the A register. Note that when a replay is won, the number of medals automatically inserted is set as the number of bet medals. In step S441, the number of read bet medals is doubled. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. Further, the address (F06F) of the medal insertion signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN) is stored in the HL register.

  In the next step S442, interrupt processing is prohibited. In step S443, a medal insertion signal output count is set. In this process, the value (medal insertion signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register is added to the A register (doubled bet medal number), and the value after the addition is added to the A register. Is stored in the process. Further, the value of the A register is stored in the address (F06F) indicated by the HL register. Thereby, the medal insertion signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to step S444, and interrupt processing is permitted.

  The processing in steps S442 to S444 described above corresponds to the processing in FIG. 19B described above. That is, interruption is prohibited before and after the medal insertion signal output count is updated. By prohibiting the interruption, as shown in FIG. 19A described above, it is possible to prevent the interruption process from being executed during the update of the medal insertion signal and the process of updating the medal insertion signal output frequency from being executed. it can. That is, after the process of updating the medal insertion signal output count is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal insertion signal is permitted to be updated.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the medal payout process (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S67 of FIG.
First, in step S451, an output request at the start of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the number of acquired (paid out) sheets in a register. In the next step S452, control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the command buffer of the RWM 61.
In step S453, the medal number setting is executed. This process is divided into the following two. As the first processing, medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the D register. Second, medal insertion number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the E register. In the next step S454, the operation flag is checked. This process is a process for determining on / off of each bit of the operation state flag (_FL_ACTION).

In the next step S455, it is determined whether or not 1BB (special combination) is operating. In the present embodiment, the 1BB operation state flag is determined based on whether or not the D1 bit of the operation state flag is “1”. If it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S456. If it is determined that the 1BB operation state flag is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S457.
In step S456, processing at the time of 1BB operation is performed. This process is a process of updating the data of the number acquired at the time of 1BB operation (1BB game), the data of the number of the acquired number at the time of 1BB operation (1BB game), and the number of the number acquired at the time of 1BB operation (1BB game) For example, a process of clearing the information on the number of acquired sheets at the time of 1BB operation may be cited when it is determined whether or not the upper limit value is exceeded.

In the next step S457, a medal payout number setting process is performed. This process is a process of storing the E register value (the medal insertion number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) as described above) in the A register. Thus, the medal inserted number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S458, it is determined whether replay is displayed. This process is a process for determining whether or not the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) is “1”. If it is determined that the replay display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S460. If it is determined that the replay display is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S459, a medal payout number setting process is performed. This process is a process of storing the D register value (the above-mentioned medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL)) in the A register. Thereby, medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is stored in the A register.
As a result of the processing in step S458 and step S459 described above, at the time of replay winning, the A register value becomes the medal insertion number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) value set at step S457, and when it is not at the time of replay winning (that is, at the time of small role winning). The A register value is the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) value set in step S459.
In step S460, a process of doubling the number of medals stored in the A register is executed. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are added, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. In addition, the medal payout signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_OUT) address is stored in the HL register.

In step S461, interrupt processing is prohibited. In the next step S462, the medal payout signal output count is set. In this process, the value stored in the address indicated by the HL register is added to the A register value, and the value after the addition is stored in the A register. By this processing, the value of the medal payout signal output count is updated. In the next step S463, interrupt processing is permitted.
Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited before and after updating the value of the medal payout signal output count.
By prohibiting the interruption, as shown in FIG. 19A, it is possible to prevent the interruption process from being executed during the update of the medal payout signal and the process of updating the medal payout signal output frequency from being executed. it can. That is, after the process of updating the medal payout signal output count is completed, the interrupt process is permitted and the medal payout signal is allowed to be updated.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals to be paid out is set to eight. However, there is a possibility that the number of payouts in the next game is updated during the output of the medal payout signal accompanying the payout of eight medals. Low (case shown in FIG. 20B). However, if the medal payout number is changed during the development process (for example, the maximum payout number is changed from 8 to 15), the payout number may be updated while the medal payout signal is being output. There is. Here, if interrupt prohibition processing is provided as in this embodiment, even if the number of medals paid out is changed during development (for example, up to 15), changes in the program can be reduced.

  In step S462, it is meaningful to set the medal payout signal output count before the actual medal payout process. Specifically, the medal payout signal output count is created from the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) except when a replay is won. At this time, if the payout process (after step S464 in FIG. 63) is performed before the medal payout signal output count is set, the medal payout number data is updated, and the correct number of medal payout signals are not output. This is because there is a risk of losing.

In the next step S464, it is determined whether or not there is a medal payout. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the D register value (medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL)), and it is determined whether or not the value after the subtraction is “0”. When it is “0”, it is determined that there is no medal payout. When it is determined that there is a medal payout, the process proceeds to step S465, and when it is determined that there is no medal payout, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S465, the number of stored sheets is read (S_CREDIT_READ). Next, the process proceeds to step S466, and it is determined whether or not the medal storage number is a limit value. When the stored number is “50”, it is determined that the stored number is the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S470. When it is determined that the stored number is not the limit, the process proceeds to step S467.

In step S467, a standby time for adding the stored medals is set. Next, the process proceeds to step S468, and wait processing is executed for the time set in step S467. After the elapse of the wait time, the process proceeds to step S469, and the number of stored sheets is added (MS_CREDIT_ADD). Then, the process proceeds to step S470.
When the process proceeds from step S466 to step S470, a medal one payout process (MS_1MEDAL_PAY) is executed. By the above process, the number of stored sheets is added until the stored number reaches the limit value, and when the stored number is the limit, a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper is executed.

In step S471, the acquisition number display is set to “+1”. This process is a process of updating the data displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72 by “+1”. For example, when the display so far is “2”, this corresponds to a process of updating the display to “3”.
In the next step S472, a process of subtracting “1” from the medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is performed. In step S473, it is determined whether or not the medal payout has been completed. This process determines whether or not the updated medal payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. When it is determined that the medal payout number is “0”, the process proceeds to step S474, and when it is determined that the medal payout number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S465.

  In step S474, an output request at the end of medal payout is set. This process is a process of storing a command indicating the end of medal payout in a register. In the next step S475, control command set 1 (S_CMD_SET) is executed. This process is a process of storing a command in the command buffer of the RWM 61. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 60 (main CPU 62). As described above, the main control board 60 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 64 at a period of 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process of FIG.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S601, in step S602, as an initial process, a register value saving process and a duplicate interrupt prohibition process are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 62 used in the main process is used in the interrupt process, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 61. Further, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt process is not started during the interrupt process. This is because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be made during the power-off process.

In the next step S603, it is determined whether or not power-off is detected. Here, when the power supply voltage becomes a predetermined value or less by a voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60 (not shown), the D0 bit of the input port 2 in FIG. Since the disconnection detection signal is input, it is detected whether or not the signal is input.
When power-off is detected, the process proceeds to power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN; FIG. 65 described later) in step S618. When it is determined that power-off is not detected, the process proceeds to step S604.

In step S604, the control counter value is updated. For example, a counter that updates the value for each interrupt process is provided (for example, when a predetermined time has elapsed based on the number of interrupt processes), the counter value is updated.
In the next step S605, timer measurement is performed. This measurement is performed by measuring whether or not 4.1 seconds have passed from the start of the previous game to the start of the current game (wait process), or a predetermined time of the input sensor 1 in the process of step S237 in FIG. It is measurement such as whether or not it has passed. In other words, a process of subtracting the time set in the main process is executed.
Next, it progresses to step S606 and LED display control is performed. Here, according to the state of the slot machine 10, the setting value, the stored number, the acquired number, the error display content (error code), etc. are turned on using the LEDs 71-73.

  In step S607, the input ports 0 to 2 are read. As a result, whether or not the operation of the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, the stop switch 42, etc. has been performed, the switch signals and the input signals of various sensors are read, and data (level data, rising edge) based on the input ports 0 to 2 are read. Data, falling data) is generated and stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 61. In the next step S608, a built-in random number check process is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the internal random number is provided, and it is determined whether or not this flag is on.

  Specifically, for example, when an abnormality in the clock frequency of the random numbers for the lottery (for example, when the random number update is late), the error flag is turned on. More specifically, it is assumed that SCLK (oscillation source: 12 MHz) and RCK (oscillation source: 9 MHz) input to the MPU are provided, and the built-in random number is updated based on RCK. At this time, the error flag is turned on when “RCK <SCLK / 2” is satisfied.

  In step S609, it is determined whether an error has occurred in the built-in random number (whether the error flag is on). If it is determined that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S610. If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S619 to shift to a non-recoverable error process (SS_ERROR_STOP). The error display content at this time is “E7”.

  In step S610, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed in units of 31 reels (left, middle, and right), and includes constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby during stoppage and shaking fluctuation (described later) depending on the operation state. . When the drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S611 to perform port output processing. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 47 are performed.

  In the next step S612, an input error check process (IS_ERROR_CHK; FIG. 66 described later) is executed. This process is a process for determining whether or not various sensors are abnormal. In the next step S613, control command transmission (IS_CMD_OUT; FIG. 70 described later) is performed. This process is a process of transmitting, for example, a control command set in the output request set and control command set 1 (an untransmitted control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 61) to the sub-control board 80.

  Specifically, for example, when a control command is set in the command buffer in step S69 (output request set) and step S70 (control command set 1) in FIG. If it is empty, the control command is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 in this step S613 in principle (interrupt processing that comes after that point).

  In the next step S614, external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL; FIG. 71 described later) is performed, and in the next step S615, external signal output processing (IS_COUNTER_OUT; FIG. 72 described later) is performed. These processes are processes for setting output data of an external signal output from the output port 6 (stored in a register) and transmitting the signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100 shown in FIG.

  In the next step S616, random number update processing is performed. In this process, random numbers are updated when random delays at the start of rotation of the reels 31 are performed (when the timing for ending the pseudo game and starting the normal game is determined). Perform delay processing based on numerical values. The pseudo game and random delay will be described later.

  In the next step S617, the register value saved in step S602 is restored, and the next interruption is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of interrupt processing is restored and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. And the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.

As shown in the above processing, in the interruption processing every 2.235 ms, the storage number display LED 71, the acquisition number display LED 72, the status display LEDs 73 (73a to 73g), and the set value display LED 63 are turned on / off by the processing in step S606. Is controlled.
Furthermore, when an untransmitted control command is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt process, the transmission process is performed.

  Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-recoverable error processing. An unrecoverable error is a serious error that cannot occur normally, and executes processing based on abnormal data (data update of the RWM 61 based on data from the input port, transmission of a control command to the sub-control board 80), etc. To prevent it from happening, interrupts themselves are prohibited.

In other words, at the time of an unrecoverable error, the control command set 1 is not transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, so it is meaningless to execute the control command set 1.
Furthermore, if an untransmitted command is stored in the control command buffer when an unrecoverable error occurs, the command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may be incorrect.

FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the power-off processing (IS_POWER_DOWN) when the power-off is detected in FIG. 64 and the process proceeds to step S618.
First, in step S651, the outputs of all output ports (0 to 6) are turned off. Next, proceeding to step S652, the power-off process completion flag (see step S13 in FIG. 32, etc.) is stored in the RWM 61. This process is a process of storing in the RWM 61 data (“1”) indicating that the power-off interrupt process is normally executed.

  In the next step S653, the control command read pointer is set to an even number (first time). As described above, when the control command is transmitted, the first control command and the second control command (two control commands) are transmitted. Further, as will be described later, the process of transmitting the first control command and the process of transmitting the second control command by one interrupt process are executed twice. However, there is a case where the power is cut off after transmitting the first control command and before transmitting the second control command. In this case, it transmits again from the first control command.

  Therefore, the process of step S653 sets the read pointer for designating the address of the buffer storing the control command to an even number in such a case. For example, when the reading pointer is “00011111”, it is set to “00011110”. If the number is even from the beginning, such as “00011110”, it is left as it is. By this process, the buffer of the designated address is always an even number, and the buffer storing the first control command is obtained. As a result, the control command can be reliably transmitted twice by simple program processing.

In the next step S654, checksum data of the RWM 61 is calculated. This process calculates a checksum including a work area (RWM 61) used in the program. Examples of the program use area to be processed include a program work area, an unused area, and a stack area.
In the next step S655, it is determined whether or not the calculation of the entire range of the checksum has been completed. If it is determined that the calculation has not been completed, the process returns to step S654 and the calculation of the checksum is continued. On the other hand, if it is determined that the checksum calculation has been completed, the process proceeds to step S656.

  In step S656, the checksum of the RWM 61 is stored in the RWM 61. Here, the data stored in the RWM 61 is processed into a value (also referred to as complement data) that becomes data indicating “0” when the checksum of the RWM 61 is performed again. As a result, when executing the checksum of the RWM 61 at the start of the program, it is only necessary to determine whether the value of the RWM 61 is “0”, thereby simplifying the program processing and shortening the processing time. Leads to. Then, the process proceeds to step S657 to enter a reset waiting state. Here, when the voltage reaches a predetermined value, a reset signal is output from the voltage monitoring device (power-off detection circuit) provided on the main control board 60, so that the output of the reset signal is awaited.

  Here, when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or lower than the predetermined value, the voltage monitoring device inputs a power-off detection signal to the D0 bit of the input port 2 and then resets the signal after a predetermined time has passed by a circuit composed of a capacitor and a resistor. Is input to the MPU. At this time, the capacitor and the resistance value are designed so that the processing time when the power is cut off is normally executed.

66 and 67 are flowcharts showing the input error check process (IS_ERROR_CHK) in step S612 of FIG. FIG. 67 is a flowchart subsequent to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing error numbers, types, and contents related to medals.
66 and 67, steps S901 to S906 determine the presence or absence of a C0 error, steps S907 to S912 determine the presence or absence of a CH error, and steps S914 to S927 indicate the presence or absence of a H0 error. Judging.

In FIG. 66, in step S901, it is determined whether or not there is an insertion related error. Here, the “input related error” refers to any of error numbers “4” to “8” in FIG.
In step S901, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the value of “_NB_ERR _ **” in the A register.
(2) Store the A register value in the C register.
(3) “_NB_ERR_CE” (= “4”) is subtracted from the A register, and the subtraction result is stored in the A register.
(4) “5” is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is less than “0”, “C (carry flag) = 1” is set.
(5) When “C = 1”, it is determined that it is a throwing related error.

For example, at the time of HP error,
A register value = 1
“1” − “4” = “253” (= “− 3”)
“253” − “5”> 0
Therefore, C ≠ 1
It becomes.
In case of CE error,
A register value = 4
“4”-“4” = “0”
“0” − “5” <0
Therefore, C = 1
It becomes.

In the next step S902, a blocker signal ON check is executed. Here, the values of the blocker signal and the hopper motor drive signal data (_PT_BLK_HPM) are stored in the A register. Then, an AND operation between the A register value and “01000000” is executed, and the operation result is stored in the A register. By this processing, the A register value becomes
When blocker signal is on: “01000000”
When blocker signal is off: “00000000”
Either.

In the next “Success sensor input detection start time valid check” in step S903, a process of ORing the register A value and the input sensor error input detection start time data (_TM1_MDL_SENS) is executed.
Here, the input sensor abnormal input detection start time data (_TM1_MDL_SENS) is set to “224” as an initial value when the blocker 47 is turned off as described above, and this value is set to “1” for each interrupt. When the insertion sensor 48 detects a medal when it becomes “0”, an error occurs.
This processing is performed after the blocker 47 is turned off because the insertion sensor 48 may detect a medal during the “224” interrupt (about 500 ms) after the blocker 47 is turned off. , “224” After the elapse of the interruption time, the input of the closing sensor 48 is determined.

Next, the process proceeds to step S904, where it is determined whether or not a closing sensor abnormality detection inspection is performed. Here, it is determined whether or not the calculation result in step S903 is “0” (zero flag is “1”). If it is “0”, it is determined that “Yes” (the input sensor abnormality detection inspection is present). . Note that the making sensor abnormality detection inspection determines whether the making sensor 48 is on or off when the blocker 47 is normally turned off and the making sensor abnormality input detection start time data is “0”. This is an inspection for determining whether or not a goto device or the like is inserted.
If “Yes” in step S904, the process proceeds to step S905, and if “No” in step S904, the process proceeds to step S907.
If “Yes” in step S904, “00100000” is stored in the E register. This E register value is used in the input error setting process in step S906.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality detection of the making sensor 2 (48b). Here, it is determined whether or not the D2 bit of the input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) is “1”. If the D2 bit is “1”, it is determined “Yes”, and the process proceeds to step S906. If it is determined “No”, the process proceeds to step S907.
Here, “Yes” in step S905 means that the insertion sensor 48b has detected a medal even though the blocker 47 is off and the insertion sensor abnormal input detection start time data is “0” (that is, It is an abnormality such as fraud.
In step S906, an input error set process (IS_ERROR_SET; FIG. 69 described later) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S907.

In step S907, it is determined whether the passage sensor 46 has risen. Here, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the input port 1 rising data (_PT_IN1_UP) is “1”. When the D0 bit is “1”, it is determined as “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S908. When it is determined as “No”, the process proceeds to step S910.
In step S908, the input monitoring counter is set to “+1”. This process is a process of adding “1” to the value of the input monitoring counter (_CT_SEN_CHK). In step S909, the passage sensor residence time and the blocker-off monitoring time are set. In this process, an initial value “200” is set in the passage sensor residence time (_TM1_CH_CHK), and an initial value “45” is set in the blocker-off monitoring time (_TM1_BLOFF_CHK). These values are decremented by “1” every time an interrupt is processed.

In step S910, it is determined whether the passage sensor 46 is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the D0 bit of the input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD) is “1”. If it is “1”, the determination is “Yes” and the process proceeds to step S911. If not, it is determined as “No” and the process proceeds to step S913. If “Yes” is determined in the step S910, “00010000” is stored in the E register. This E register value is used in the input error setting process in step S912.
In step S911, it is determined whether the residence time of the passage sensor 46 has elapsed. In this process, the value of the passage sensor residence time (_TM1_CH_CHK) is stored in the A register, and when the A register value is “0”, “Yes” is determined. If “Yes” is determined in step S911, the process proceeds to step S912. If “No” is determined, the process proceeds to step S913.
In step S912, input error set processing (IS_ERROR_SET) is performed. Then, the process proceeds to step S913.

In step S913, it is determined whether an HP error (error number 1) is present. Here, “1” is subtracted from the C register value. When the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that the HP error has occurred, and when it is not “0”, it is determined that the HP error has not occurred. The C register stores a value corresponding to the error number in step S901.
When it is determined that the HP error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S928 in FIG. 67. When it is determined that the HP error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S914.

In the “payout sensor 1 (37a) abnormality detection data RWM address set” in step S914, the payout sensor 1 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK1) is stored in the HL register.
In the “payout sensor 2 (37b) abnormality detection data RWM lower address set” in the next step S915, the payout sensor 2 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK2) is stored in the DE register.
In the “payout sensor 1 mask data and payout sensor 1 bit set” in the next step S916, a process of storing “00001000” in the B register and the C register is executed.

  In step S917, it is determined whether the drive signal for the hopper motor 36 is on. This process determines whether or not the D7 bit of the “blocker signal and hopper motor drive signal data (_PT_BLK_HPM)” is “1”, and determines “Yes” when it is “1”. If “Yes” in the step S917, the process proceeds to a step S918, and if “No”, the process proceeds to a step S919. If “Yes” in step S917, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged. As a result, the HL register value becomes “payout sensor 2 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK2)”, and the DE register value becomes “payout sensor 1 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK1)”. The reason for this processing is that when the hopper motor drive signal is on, the payout sensor 2 is the inspection object, and when the hopper motor drive signal is off, the payout sensor 1 is the inspection object.

In the “payout sensor 1, 2 mask and payout sensor 2 bit set” in step S918, a process of storing “00011000” in the B register and “00010000” in the C register is executed.
In the next step S919, payout sensor check data is generated. Specifically, this process includes the following processes.
(1) Store input port 2 level data (_PT_IN2_OLD) in the A register.
(2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the B register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.
Specifically, when “Yes” in step S917, the B register value is “00011000”. Therefore, when this value and the input port 2 level data value are ANDed, bits other than the D3 and D4 bits are set to “0”. Become.
On the other hand, if “No” in step S917, the B register value becomes the value (00001000) set in step S916. Therefore, when this value and the input port 2 level data value are ANDed, bits other than the D3 bit are “0”. "
(3) The C register value is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that the A register value and the C register value match, that is, when the subtraction result is “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”. This zero flag is used in later processing.
Specifically, if “Yes” in step S917, the A register value is “0” except for the D3 and D4 bits. Therefore, the C register value (00010000) is subtracted from this value, and the subtraction result is “0”. When it is “0” (that is, when the zero flag is “1”), it means that the payout sensor 1 (37a) is off and the payout sensor 2 (37b) is on.
When “No” is determined in step S917, since the A register value is “0” except for the D3 bit, the C register value (00001000) is subtracted from this value, and the subtraction result is “0” ( That is, when the zero flag is “1”), it means that the payout sensor 1 (37a) is on.

In the “abnormality detection data clear data set” in the next step S920, a process of storing “0” in the A register is executed. In the next “clear sensor abnormality detection data not checked” in step S921, the address indicated by the DE register value, that is, “payout sensor 1 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK1)” or “payout sensor 2 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK2)”. The A register value “0” is stored in the data.
In step S922, it is determined whether an abnormality of the payout sensor (1 or 2) is detected. Here, it is determined whether or not the above-described zero flag is “1”. When the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that an abnormality has been detected, and the process proceeds to step S923. On the other hand, when the zero flag is not “1”, it is determined that no abnormality is detected, and the process proceeds to step S925 (FIG. 67).
As described above, the zero flag becomes “1” when “Yes” in step S917 is when the payout sensor 1 (37a) is off and the payout sensor 2 (37b) is on, and step S917. If “No”, the payout sensor 1 (37a) is on.

In step S923, it is determined whether or not the abnormality detection time of the payout sensor (1 or 2) has elapsed. As described above, when “Yes” is determined in step S917, the time of the payout sensor 2 (37b) is an object, and when “No” is determined in step S917, the time of the payout sensor 1 (37a) is an object. In this processing, the A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register, that is, “payout sensor 1 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK1)” or “payout sensor 2 abnormality detection data (_WK_H0_CHK2)”. Then, “4” is subtracted from the A register value, and when the calculation result is less than “0”, C (carry flag) = “1” is set. Then, it is determined whether or not C (carry flag) is “1”. When it is not “1”, “Yes” is determined, and when it is “1”, “No” is determined.
For example, when A register value = “1”,
1-4 <0
Therefore, C (carry flag) = “1”, and “No” is determined.
For example, when A register value = “4”,
4-4 = 0
Therefore, C (carry flag) ≠ “1”, and “Yes” is determined.

If “Yes” in the step S923, the process proceeds to a step S925, and if “No”, the process proceeds to a step S924.
In “payout sensor 1 or 2 abnormality detection data + 1 data generation” in step S924, a process of adding “1” to the A register value is executed.
In “update payout sensor 1 or 2 abnormality detection data” in the next step S925, the A register value is stored in the address indicated by the HL register. Then, “4” is subtracted from the A register value, and when the calculation result is less than “0”, C (carry flag) = “1” is set. Further, “01000000” is stored in the E register. This E register value is used in the input error setting process in step S927.

Next, in step S926, it is determined whether or not the abnormality detection time of the payout sensor 1 or 2 has elapsed. This process determines whether C (carry flag) = “1”, and executes a process of determining “Yes” when it is not “1” and “No” when it is “1”.
If “Yes” is determined in step S926, the process proceeds to step S927. If “No” is determined in step S926, the process proceeds to step S928. In step S927, an input error set process (IS_ERROR_SET) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S928.

In step S928, the previous specific information is extracted. In this process, the address (F00F) of the specific information flag (_FL_ERROR_INF) is stored in the HL register, and the data at the address indicated by the HL register is stored (saved) in the C register. As a result, the previous specific information is stored in the C register.
In step S929, door switch information, setting door switch information, setting key switch information, and setting / reset switch information are set. Here, the data of the input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD) is stored in the A register, the A register value and “00011110” are ANDed (to set the D0 and D5 to D7 bits to “0”), and the calculation is performed. A process of storing the result in the A register is executed.

In the next step S930, the latest specific information is stored. Here, the process of storing the value of the A register at the address (specific information flag (_FL_ERROR_INF)) indicated by the HL register is executed. In “next output request set of specific information other than power interruption recovery” in the next step S931, “00110100” is stored in the D register and the A register value is stored in the E register.
In step S932, it is determined whether or not it is a time of return from power-off. This process is a process for determining whether or not the D6 bit of the C register is “0”. As for the C register value, the previous specific information is stored in step S928. When the D6 bit is “1”, it means that the transmission bit at the time of power-off recovery is “1”.

If it is determined that the power supply has been restored, the process proceeds to step S933. If it is determined that the power supply has not been restored, the process proceeds to step S934.
In step S933, an output request set of specific information at the time of power-off recovery is performed. This processing is processing for setting the D6 bit of the E register value to “1”. Note that the latest specific information is stored in the E register in step S 930. Then, the process proceeds to step S934.

In step S934, change data between the previous specific information and the latest specific information is checked. In this process, the A register value and the C register value are XORed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.
In step S935, it is determined whether specific information should be transmitted. This process determines whether or not the A register value is “0”. When it is “0”, “No” (no specific information is transmitted), and when it is not “0”, “Yes” (specific information) Send). When it is determined as “No”, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated. If it is determined “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S936. In step S936, control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) is executed. Thereby, specific information is memorize | stored in RWM61 as 1st control command data and 2nd control command data. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Here, at the time of return from power-off, the D6 bit of the specific information flag is set to “1” in step S838 of FIG. 36. Therefore, in the first interrupt processing after power-off, FIG. In step S928, the D6 bit of the previous specific information flag is always “1”. Further, the D6 bit of the latest specific information flag is set to “0” by the processing of steps S929 and S930. Thereby, in the first interrupt processing after the return from power-off, it is determined that there is a change in the D6 bit of the specific information flag, so “Yes” is determined in step S935.
In steps S934 and S935, if the previous specific information flag and the latest specific information flag have a change bit, it is determined to transmit the specific information, so that, for example, the door switch 16 is switched from OFF to ON. Even in such a case, the specific information can be transmitted to the sub-control board 80 without fail. In addition, since the specific information is transmitted to the sub-control board 80 only when it has a change bit, it is possible to prevent the command buffer from becoming full.

In the present embodiment, as the first control command data, data set to a predetermined value such as “B4 (H)” is used.
The second control command data is 1-byte data representing a specific information flag.
For example, when the second control command data is “01001000”, when the power is restored (D6 bit is “1”), the setting key is turned (D3 bit is “1”), but the door switch and the setting door switch are This command indicates that it is off (D1 and D2 bits are “0”).
Note that the specific information as described above is configured to be transmitted not only when power is restored, but also when the specific information has changed. For example, when the setting is changed, when the setting key is turned but the door switch and the setting door switch are off, the specific information flag is “00001000”, so this information can be transmitted.
When the sub control board 80 receives the command, it performs error notification according to the received command. This point will be described later.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the “input error set processing (IS_ERROR_SET)” in FIGS. 66 and 67.
In “abnormal input flag update” in step S941, the following processing is executed.
(1) Store the data stored in the abnormal input flag (_FL_IN_ABNML) in the A register.
(2) The A register value is stored (saved) in the D register.
(3) An OR operation is performed on the A register value and the E register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register. As described above, when the input error setting process is the process of step S906, for example, “00100000” is stored in the E register when “Yes” is set in step S904.
(4) The A register value is stored (updated) in the abnormal input flag (_FL_IN_ABNML).

Next, data on whether or not to transmit an error and a command for transmission are generated.
(5) Store the D register value in the A register.
(6) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the E register value (value set in step S904, S910, or S925), and the operation result is stored in the A register.
For example, in the case where “00010000” is stored in the E register in step S910 and the input error set process is executed in step S912, for example, when the A register value is “01000000”
A register value: 01000000
E register value: 00010000
A register value: 00000000 (after AND operation)
It becomes.
For example, in the case where “01000000” is stored in the E register in step S925 and the input error set process is executed in step S927, for example, when the A register value is “01010000”:
A register value: 01010000
E register value: 01000000
A register value: 01000000 (after AND operation)
It becomes.

(7) XOR the A register value and the E register value.
For example,
A register value: 00000000
E register value: 00010000
A register value: 00010000 (after XOR operation)
It becomes.
For example,
A register value: 01000000
E register value: 01000000
A register value: 00000000 (after XOR operation)
It becomes.

In step S942, it is determined whether or not an abnormal input error is detected. Here, when the A register value is “0” (zero flag = “1”), “No” is determined, and when the A register value is not “0”, “Yes” is determined. When it is determined “No”, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and when it is determined “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S943.
By the above processing, an abnormal input error is detected in step S942 only when there is a change before and after the update of the abnormal input flag in step S941.
In step S943, output request setting processing at the start of error display is performed. This process is a process of storing “00000001” in the D register. In step S944, control command set 2 (SS_CMD_SET) is executed. As a result, the control command data is stored in the RWM 61 and an error command is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

When an error is detected after the start switch 41 is operated, error processing (FIG. 61) is executed after all reels 31 are stopped (between steps S64 and S65 in FIG. 39). When an error is detected after all the reels 31 are stopped, error processing is executed immediately before step S58 in FIG.
In other words, the main control board 60 does not stop the game immediately after sending the error command in the input error check process, but the sub control board 80 immediately notifies the error as described later. By configuring in this way, the game by the player can proceed until a specific process is executed, and the error notification is executed immediately, so that the hall clerk immediately generates an error. You can know what you did. As a result, an efficient program that does not give a player or a hole a disadvantage associated with the occurrence of an error can be realized.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing control command transmission in step S613 of FIG.
First, in step S661, the address of the control command buffer is set. Control command data transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80 is stored in a buffer associated with an address in the RWM 61. Also, data indicating a read pointer for designating which address control command data is read is also stored in the RWM 61 in association with the address. Therefore, in step S661, the head address of the control command buffer and the address storing the read pointer stored in the RWM 61 are acquired.

In step S662, a read pointer is acquired. This process is a process for acquiring the current read pointer from the area in which the read pointer of the RWM 61 is stored.
In the next step S663, the address of the control command buffer to be transmitted is set. This process is a process for calculating the address of the control command buffer of the RWM 61 to be read next from the start address of the control command buffer and the read pointer.

  In step S664, it is determined whether or not a control command (to be transmitted) is included. If there is control command data at the address set in step S663, it is determined that there is a control command, and if the data at that address is “0”, it is determined that there is no control command. If it is determined that there is a control command, the process proceeds to step S665. If it is determined that there is no control command, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

In step S665, an address is set in the SCU3 data register. In this embodiment, an SCU3 data register is used as a storage area for storing control command data for transmission, and the address of this register is set.
Next, proceeding to step S666, the first control command data is written to the address (SCU3 data register) set at step S665. As a result, the first control command data is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Further, the data of the address of the control command buffer to be transmitted is set to “+1”. Thereby, the address where the second control command data is stored is set.

Next, proceeding to step S677, as in step S666, the second control command data to be transmitted is written into the SCU3 data register. As a result, the second control command data is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
In the next step S668, it is determined whether transmission of the control command is completed. Here, it is determined whether or not the read pointer data is an odd number. When it is an odd number, it indicates the second transmission, and when it is an even number, it indicates the first transmission.
In the present embodiment, such processing is performed in order to transmit the same control command (first control command and second control command) to the sub-control board 80 twice in succession (with two interrupts). .

If it is determined in step S668 that a control command has been transmitted (read pointer data is an odd number), the process proceeds to step S669. If it is determined that no control command has been transmitted, the process proceeds to step S670.
In step S669, the transmitted control command data is cleared. That is, the data stored in the control command buffer is deleted, and the area of the RWM 61 is emptied.
In step S670, the read pointer data is updated by "+1". Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing “external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL)” in step S614 of FIG.
First, in step S951, an external signal output flag (_FL_INF_OUT; FIG. 17) is acquired. The acquired value is stored in the B register. The bits acquired here are D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) out of 8 bits. These D2 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 3) correspond to the output port 6.
In the present embodiment, the B register is used as a register for storing external signal output data.

In step S952, it is determined whether the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is on. In this processing, the address (F00A) of the input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD) is stored in the HL register. Next, the address data indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register. Then, an AND operation is performed on the A register value and “00000110”, and when the operation result is “0” (when the Z flag = 0), “No” is determined.
When it is determined that the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S953. When it is determined that the door switch signal or the setting door switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S954.
In step S953, external signal 5 output data set processing is performed. In this process, “1” is added to the B register value. Here, the D0 bit of the B register value so far is “0”, but the D0 bit of the B register is set to “1” by this processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S954. This D0 bit corresponds to the D0 bit of the output port 6.

In step S954, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch signal is ON. This process determines whether or not the D3 bit is “1” in the data at the address indicated by the HL register (input port 1 level data (_PT_IN1_OLD)). When it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S957, and when it is determined that the setting key switch signal is not on, the process proceeds to step S955.
In the “abnormal input flag and external signal 4 output time data check at power failure recovery” in the next step S955, the data of the abnormal input flag (_FL_IN_ABNML) is stored in the A register. The abnormal input flag is generated during the input error check process (IS_ERROR_CHK) (more specifically, step S941). Further, an OR operation is performed on the value of the external signal 4 output time (_TM1_POWER_ON) and the A register value when the power is restored, and the calculation result is stored in the A register.

Then, in the next “No data?” In step S956, it is determined whether or not the A register value (value calculated in step S955) is “0”. When the A register value is “0” (zero flag = 1), it is determined as “Yes”, and the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
On the other hand, if “No” is determined in step S956, the process proceeds to step S957, and the D1 bit of the B register is set to “1”. This D1 bit corresponds to the D1 bit of the output port 6. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.
By the above “external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL)”, the D0 to D4 bits of the B register are set to a predetermined value.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing “external signal output (IS_COUNTER_OUT)” in step S615 of FIG.
First, in “External signal output time end?” In step S961, the following processing is executed.
(1) The address (F027) of the RWM 61 storing medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO) is stored in the DE register.
(2) Store the external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) (F02A) in the A register.
(3) When the value of the A register is “0” (when zero flag = 1), it is determined as “Yes”. When it is determined “Yes”, the process proceeds to step S962, and when it is determined “No”, the process proceeds to step S971.

In step S962, “46” (initial value) is set in the external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT). Through the above processing, when the external signal output time (_TM1_OUT_CNT) is “0”, “46” is set, and when it is not “0”, the setting is not performed.
In the next step S963 “Medal insertion signal output count?”, The following processing is executed.
(1) The address (F06F) of the RWM 61 that stores the medal insertion signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN) is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value stored at the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is “0” (when the TZ flag = 0), it is determined as “No”. When it is determined “Yes” in step S963, the process proceeds to step S964, and when it is determined “No”, the process proceeds to step S966.

In “next medal insertion signal output count−1” in step S964, the value (medal insertion signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_IN)) “1” stored in the address indicated by the HL register is subtracted.
In the next step S965 “medal insertion signal output data bit on”, the D6 bit of the C register is set to “1”. The D6 bit corresponds to the D6 bit (medal insertion signal) of the output port 6.

In the next step S966 “Medal payout signal output count?”, The following processing is executed.
(1) The address value stored in the HL register is set to “+1”. As a result, the HL register value is changed from “F06F” to “F070”.
(2) The value (medal payout signal output count (_CT_MEDAL_OUT)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register.
(3) When the A register value is not “0” (when the TZ flag ≠ 0), it is determined as “Yes”. If “Yes” is determined in step S966, the process proceeds to step S967. If “No” is determined, the process proceeds to step S969.

In step S967, “1” is subtracted from the medal payout output count. Specifically, the value stored at the address (F070) indicated by the HL register is set to “−1”.
In the “medal payout signal output data bit on” in the next step S968, the D5 bit of the C register is set to “1”. The D5 bit corresponds to the D5 bit (medal payout signal) of the output port 6. Then, the process proceeds to step S969.

In step S969, ON / OFF inversion of the output bit is performed. Here, the following processing is executed.
(1) The value (medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO)) stored in the address (F027) indicated by the DE register is stored in the A register.
(2) XOR the A register value and the C register value and store the operation result in the A register.
(3) The A register value is stored in the address (F027; medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO)) indicated by the DE register.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 18 and the like, when the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, the D5 bit is always “1”. When the medal insertion signal output count is not “0”, the D6 bit is always “1”.
On the other hand, in the medal signal data (F027) as the A register value, the D5 bit is “1” when the medal payout signal is on, and the D5 bit is “0” when the medal payout signal is off. Similarly, in the medal signal data, the D6 bit is “1” when the medal insertion signal is on, and the D6 bit is “0” when it is off.

Therefore, for example, when the medal payout signal is “1” and the medal payout signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 00100 000
C register value: 00100 000
After XOR operation: 00000000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “0”.
When the medal payout signal is “0” and the medal payout signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 00000000
C register value: 00100 000
After XOR operation: 00100 000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “1”.

The same applies to the medal insertion signal. For example, when the medal payout signal is “0”, the medal insertion signal is “1”, the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, and the medal insertion signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 01000000
C register value: 01100000
After XOR operation: 00100 000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “1”, and the medal insertion signal is “0”.
Similarly, for example, when the medal payout signal is “1”, the medal insertion signal is “0”, the medal payout signal output count is not “0”, and the medal insertion signal output count is not “0”,
A register value: 00100 000
C register value: 01100000
After XOR operation: 01000000 (updated A register value)
Thus, the updated medal payout signal is “0” and the medal insertion signal is “1”.

In step S970, output data of a medal insertion signal and a medal payout signal are set. In this process, the value stored in the address (F027; medal signal data (_PT_MEDAL_IO)) indicated by the DE register is stored in the A register.
With this processing, when the medal insertion signal is on, the D6 bit of the A register is “1”, and when the medal insertion signal is on, the D5 bit of the A register is “1”.

In the “external signal, medal insertion signal and medal payout signal output data set” in the next step S971, the B register value and the A register value are ORed, and the calculation result is stored in the A register. Here, the B register value is a value stored by “external signal output data management (IS_INF_CTL)” of FIG. 71, and D0 to D4 bits (external signals 1 to 5) are defined.
The A register stores medal insertion signal and medal payout signal data according to this flowchart. Therefore, by ORing the B register value and the A register value, the data of the external signals 1 to 5, the medal insertion signal and the medal payout signal data are combined into the A register (1 byte). Further, the A register value is stored in the output port 6. As a result, an external signal is transmitted from the output port 6. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

Next, information processing on the sub control board 80 side will be described.
FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing a program start process of the sub control board 80 and a main process on the sub side.
In FIG. 73, when the power is turned on in step S700 and the program of the sub-control board 80 is started, first, in step S701, the sub-control board 80 prohibits interrupt processing. In the next step S702, the sub-control board 80 executes various initialization processes. The initialization process includes initialization of the sub CPU 82 and the RWM 81.

  The RWM 81 to be initialized here is not an RWM (register) built in the sub CPU 82 but an RWM provided on the sub control board 80 and provided outside the MPU (sub CPU 82). In the following description, the RWM 81 indicates this external RWM. Also, the initialization of the RWM 81 in step S702 means initialization of a range to be initialized by power-off (erasing of data to be erased by power-off).

In the next step S703, the sub control board 80 determines whether or not the checksums match. In this process, a checksum is calculated when the power is turned on and compared with the checksum stored in the RWM 81 when the power is turned off to determine whether or not they match.
If it is determined that the checksums match, the process proceeds to step S704. If it is determined that the checksums do not match, the process proceeds to step S705.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not a power interruption has occurred during the main process on the sub-control board 80 side, that is, the “1 command process” in step S710 of FIG. When it is determined that a power interruption has occurred during the processing of one command (“Yes” in step S704), the processing according to this flowchart is terminated, and the program during the one command processing executed before the power interruption Return to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the power is not cut off during one command processing, the process proceeds to step S706.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S703 to step S705, the RWM 81 is cleared. Here, clearing the RWM 81 means clearing data that has not been initialized in step S702. For example, the RWM 81 stores data that is erased (cleared) every time the power is turned off and data that is not erased only when the power is turned off. As data that is not erased only by turning off the power, for example, an effect stage is cited.

When the process proceeds from step S704 or step S705 to step S706, the main process on the sub-control board 80 side is started.
First, in step S706, the sub-control board 80 clears the mounted watchdog timer. In step S707, the watchdog timer operation process (measurement) is started. The watchdog timer outputs a pulse for determining the runaway of the sub CPU 82 and continues to count the number of output pulses. As will be described later, when the count value (time value) of the number of pulses reaches a predetermined value (for example, “500 ms”) before the watchdog timer is cleared, it is determined that the sub CPU 82 is running out of control, The processing of the sub-control board 80 is shifted to processing at power-on.

  Next, the process proceeds to step S708, and interrupt processing (which was prohibited in step S701) is permitted. When interrupt processing is permitted in step S708, interrupt processing is performed.

In the next step S709, processing is performed every 16 ms (processing per frame). The processing executed by the sub-control board 80 includes processing performed once every 16 ms (processing every 16 ms or one frame processing) and one command processing performed within 16 ms. In step S709, the process is executed every 16 ms out of these processes.
As processing for every 16 ms, monitoring whether the image display device 23 (liquid crystal display) is operating normally, monitoring whether the sound source amplifier of the speaker 22 is operating normally, measurement of power-on time, push Generation of level data and rising data based on the operation of the button 24 and the cross key 25, measurement of error time, reel 31 drive time, and the like are executed.

Next, proceeding to step S710, one command processing (processing for one instruction) is executed. As one command processing, for example, effect lottery, receiving a command from the main control board 60, and performing error notification or the like can be mentioned.
For example, when the error display start command transmitted in steps S388 and S389 (FIG. 61) is received, the fact that the error has been detected by the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display device 23 according to the received command and the error content are displayed. Inform.

Further, when the command of the specific information transmitted in steps S935 and S936 (FIG. 67) is received, the fact that the error has been detected and the error content are notified according to the received command in the same manner as described above.
As described above, for example, when the first control command data is “B4 (H)” and the second control command data is “01001000” (when power-off detection and setting key switch detection is detected), the setting change error occurs. Notify that it is. Specifically, output of a warning sound from the speaker 22, high-speed blinking of the effect lamp 21, and an image display indicating a setting change operation error by the image display device 23 are included.
In addition, when the first control command data is “B4 (H)” and the second control command data is “00001000” (when the setting key switch is turned on), it is notified that the setting key is abnormal. Specifically, output of a warning sound from the speaker 22, high-speed blinking of the effect lamp 21, and an image display indicating that the setting key by the image display device 23 is abnormal are included.
Furthermore, error notification is performed in the same manner when an abnormality detection command transmitted in steps S943 and S944 (FIG. 69) is received.
If an error occurs in a game that performs push order notification during ART, the player may not be notified of a push order advantageous to the player, or other effect lamps that are not used for error notification (for example, In addition, the notification may be performed by a stop switch LED or the like provided in the stop switch 42.

Further, when commands of different systems (for example, a first system command and a second system command) are received as one command process, the one command process is executed for each command.
For example, as a first system command, a command (such as a command showing a lottery result, an error number command, a setting change start command, etc.) necessary for smoothly progressing the game, and as a second system command, a game Commands that do not directly affect the progress of the command (commands in which the start switch 41 is operated when the role lottery is not performed, commands for which the stop switch 42 is operated in the case where the stop control of the reel 31 is not performed, and the like are input to input ports) Information).
In such a case, in the one command processing, the command processing is executed in a series of order such as the first system command → the second system command.

If a power interruption occurs during the processing of one command, complete recovery processing is performed. In the complete recovery process, the process returns from the timing at which the power interruption during one command processing occurs.
On the other hand, when power interruption occurs other than during one command processing, normal return processing is performed. In the normal return process, the sub CPU 82 and the RWM 81 are initialized, and the process is executed from the beginning of the sub process.

After execution of the one command process, the process proceeds to step S711, and it is determined whether 16 ms has elapsed. In this embodiment, whether or not 16 ms has elapsed is provided by providing a counter that increments “+1” for each interrupt process (every 1 ms), and determining whether or not the counter value has reached “+16”. .
If it is determined that 16 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S710 to continue the one-command processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S711 that 16 ms has elapsed, the counter value for counting 16 ms is reset, the process returns to step S706, and the watchdog timer started in step S707 is cleared. Therefore, at this time, the number of pulses (time) of the watchdog timer that has been counted is cleared.

  As shown in FIG. 73, the watchdog timer is cleared every 16 ms, but if it is not cleared for a certain time (for example, 500 ms), a watchdog timer interrupt process is generated and the process returns to step S701. Control.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the power-off process in the sub control board 80. This process is executed when the sub-control board 80 detects power-off. In this embodiment, the power interruption is detected every interrupt process (every 1 ms).
In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, power is supplied to the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80, respectively, and when the power interruption occurs, the sub control board 80 is more than the main control board 60. Is also configured to detect with a delay. For example, the sub control board 80 performs power supply recovery processing when an 8V voltage is supplied, and the main control board 60 performs power supply recovery processing when a 9V voltage is supplied. By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of control commands transmitted from the main control board 60.

  In FIG. 74, when the power-off is detected, the process proceeds to step S721, and the sub-control board 80 stops the watchdog timer. In the next step S722, it is determined whether or not program processing is being performed. When power-off is detected, it is determined whether the program start process or sub-main process in FIG. 73 is in progress. If it is determined that the program start process is being performed, the process proceeds to step S725. If it is determined that the sub-main process is being performed, the process proceeds to step S723.

  In step S723, a checksum is calculated. Then, in the next step S724, various data is saved in the RWM 81. Here, examples of the various data include programs that have been executed as a result of calculating the checksum.

When the process proceeds from step S722 or step S724 to step S725, it is determined whether or not 500 ms has elapsed since the power-off was detected. When it is determined that 500 ms has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S726, and when it is determined that 500 ms has elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart is terminated.
In step S726, it is determined whether power has been restored. When it is determined that it has returned, the process proceeds to step S727 to shift to instantaneous interruption processing, and when it is determined that it has not returned, the process returns to step S725.

  FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing setting change start processing in the sub-control board 80. When the change of the setting value is started in the main control board 60, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 33, an output request at the start of the setting change is set in step S807, and the control command set 1 is set in the next step S808. Executed.

  Then, in the interrupt processing (FIG. 64) by the main control board 60, the control command indicating that the setting change has been started is transmitted by the control command transmission (FIG. 70) in step S613. When the control command is received, it is determined that the change of the setting value is started on the main control board 60 side. In response to this, the process of FIG. 75 is started.

The sub-control board 80 is controlled by interrupt processing (NMI may be higher) than the above-described 1 ms interrupt processing and other interrupt processing to prevent the control command from the main control board 60 from being missed. The command reception process is executed, and the received control commands are sequentially stored in the RWM 81 (which may be a circuit in the chip) having a predetermined storage area of the sub-control board 80.
This storage area is a storage area that is not erased even in the setting change process. Thus, even when a control command is transmitted from the main control board 60 when the sub control board 80 is initialized, processing based on the command is normally executed.

The setting change start process is a process performed in step S710 (one command process) in FIG.
In FIG. 75, when the setting change process is started in step S750, the interrupt process is prohibited in step S751. Note that interruption of a control command (every 2.235 ms) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80 is not prohibited. Also, the control command reception process does not prohibit interrupts in order to prevent the control command from being missed.

  For example, when the input port of the push button 24 is detected by a 1 ms interrupt, the detection result is stored in the RWM 81, and it is detected that the push button 24 is turned on by all 16 interrupts (the number of loops) A specification that determines that the push button 24 has been operated in every 16 ms processing (one frame processing; step S709) can be considered. In this case, if a 1 ms interrupt is executed during initialization, there is a possibility that the data in the storage area of the RWM 81 related to the input of the push button 24 will be updated. That is, although the data of the RWM 81 is being initialized, there is a possibility that the data is updated to new data according to the operation of the push button 24. Thus, during the initialization, the interrupt processing is prohibited, so that the data update in the storage area of the RWM 81 can be eliminated.

In the next step S752, the sub control board 80 stops the watchdog timer. This process is to prevent the watchdog timer clear process from being executed during the initialization process of the RWM 81 to be executed later. In other words, if it is determined as a runaway, the initialization process is interrupted.
Next, proceeding to step S753, the sub-control board 80 designates an address for starting initialization of the RWM 81. Here, the range of addresses to be initialized is specified. Next, the process proceeds to step S754, and initialization processing for the range is executed.

In step S755, it is determined whether the initialization process of the RWM 81 is completed. When it is determined that the initialization process has not been completed, the initialization process is continued. When it is determined that the initialization process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S756. When it is determined that the initialization process has not been completed, Returning to step S754, the initialization process is continued.
In step S756, the stop of the watchdog timer stopped in step S752 is released. The cancellation of the stop is considered to be the case where the timing is started from the middle when the watchdog timer is stopped, and the case where the timing is started from the initial value, not the time when the watchdog timer is stopped. .
In the next step S757, the interrupt prohibited in step S751 is permitted. Then, the process according to this flowchart is terminated.

As described above, when the sub control board 80 receives the control command for starting the setting change from the main control board 60, the sub control board 80 executes initialization of a predetermined range of the RWM 81 on the sub control board 80 side.
In the above process, since the watchdog timer is stopped and then the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RWM 81, the restart process by the watchdog timer can be prevented from being executed during the initialization process.
In the present embodiment, at the time of the setting change start process, the watchdog timer is stopped in step S752. However, instead of this, a process of clearing the watchdog timer may be performed.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) Freeze and pseudo game Freezing can be executed in the slot machine 10.
Here, “freezing” means delaying the progress of the game by pausing for a predetermined period of time. For example, receiving a medal, receiving an operation of the bet switch 40, operating the start switch 41 and the stop switch 42. Is to temporarily stop the function relating to the acceptance of the (reception of the stop operation of the reel 31). It is possible to execute such a freeze and output various effects during the freeze period.

Furthermore, a pseudo game may be executed during the freeze period.
Here, the main game and the pseudo game will be described.
The “main game” is the original function of the operation switch (the bet switch 40 is a function for inserting a medal to start the game, the start switch 41 is a function for starting the rotation of the reel 31 to start the game, stop The switch 42 is a game in which the function of stopping the rotating reel 31 within the range of the maximum number of moving frames based on the lottery result of the winning combination is effective as a game to obtain a game result. Point to.

  In this game, when the bet switch 40 is operated, medals are inserted, when the start switch 41 is operated, the reel 31 starts rotating (and the lottery is performed), and the stop switch 42 is operated. Sometimes, the reel 31 is stopped based on the winning lottery result, and the game result in the game is displayed by the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped.

  On the other hand, during the freeze, no medals are inserted even if the bet switch 40 is operated, the rotation of the reel 31 does not start even if the start switch 41 is operated, and the reel 31 is operated even if the stop switch 42 is operated. The fact that the game result is not displayed (the reel 31 does not stop) or the like is a state in which the function of the operation switch is not effective for obtaining the game result in the game by proceeding with the game.

  The “pseudo game” is a game that is executed during the freeze. Unlike the main game, the function of at least one operation switch is to advance the main game and obtain a game result. Refers to games that are not valid. In particular, from the time when the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 becomes a constant speed and the operation of the stop switch 42 can be accepted (until the function of the stop switch 42 becomes effective for obtaining a game result). During this period, a pseudo game is executed.

  The timing of executing the pseudo game is, for example, the next game after the end of the precursor. The next game is notified to aim at a combination of symbols to be stopped by the pseudo game, for example, “Red 7” assortment (ART operation symbol).

When it is decided to execute the pseudo game, the pseudo game is started before the start of the main game in the next game.
When the player operates the start switch 41, a combination of lotteries is performed and a pseudo game is started. On the other hand, when the start switch 41 is operated, the rotation of the reel 31 is started. When the reel 31 is rotated by operating the start switch 41 and the game is executed before the main game in the game, the rotation of the reel 31 by the operation of the start switch 41 is simulated. It becomes a game.

Further, in the pseudo game, when the player operates the stop switch 42, the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is changed to change the display state of the symbols different from the stop state for displaying the game result. Control is performed so that a display state of a combination of symbols that does not indicate a result (a state close to the stop of the reel 31) is obtained. That is, although the function of the stop switch 42 is not effective for displaying the game result, the reel 31 is changed by the operation of the stop switch 42 as an opportunity.
At this time, the above-mentioned ART operation symbol is displayed with the operation of the stop switch 42 as an opportunity, thereby producing an effect of performing the ART. Further, an external signal may be transmitted when the ART operation symbol is displayed.

  In addition, during the pseudo game, when displaying the ART operation symbol triggered by the operation of the stop switch 42, the ART operation symbol is the stop control using the stop position determination table in this game (the maximum number of smooth frames is three). However, the reel 31 may always display the ART operation pattern on the effective line regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (even when the maximum number of sliding frames exceeds 3 frames). May be controlled. This is because the pseudo game is not limited by the maximum number of sliding frames in the game.

Further, it is assumed that the display state of the symbol during the pseudo game is accompanied by fluctuation of the swing without the reel 31 (the symbol) completely staying at a certain position.
Here, “fluctuation fluctuation” means that a symbol repeats moving up and down with a constant amplitude (swing width). For example, the operation is such that after moving at a close position for a predetermined time, moving downward and holding at that position for a predetermined time, moving upward again and stopping for a predetermined time.

More specifically, it stays at that position for about 390 ms from the time the symbol is displayed, moves to the upper position, stays at that position for about 10 ms, then moves to the lower position and stays at that position for about 10 ms. , And so on, a pattern that stays about 390 ms at first, then repeats moving and staying for about 10 ms.
The reason for setting the first staying time to about 390 ms is to distinguish it from the stop for displaying the game result by setting the staying time to less than 500 ms.

  “Stopping the reel 31” means displaying a game result. Then, once the game result is displayed, the reel 31 displaying the game result cannot be changed again within the same game. Therefore, if the reel 31 is stopped during the pseudo game, then the reel 31 cannot be stopped and the game result cannot be displayed in this game.

Therefore, during the pseudo game, with the operation of the stop switch 42 as a trigger, the display state of the symbol accompanied by the fluctuation of the shake, which is a state close to the stop of the reel 31 (also referred to as temporary temporary stop or pseudo stop), is set. That is, the display state of the symbol during the pseudo game is not a stop indicating the game result. In other words, even if the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 does not stop so as to show the game result in the game.
For this reason, the display state of the symbol during the pseudo game does not mean that the symbol combination corresponding to the combination has stopped on the active line, that is, the combination winning combination. Therefore, medals are not paid out as in the small role winning, and medals are not automatically inserted as in the replay winning.

  In this way, in the pseudo game, after all the reels 31 are set to the symbol display state, the player waits for the start switch 41 to be operated, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the pseudo game and freeze are performed. And all the reels 31 are changed again. Note that the operation of the start switch 41 at this time is an operation in a state where the function of the start switch 41 is not effective for obtaining a game result, and the player ends the pseudo game by himself (freezing is performed). (Cancel or cancel) operation. Further, the re-change of the reel 31 is controlled so that the rotation start timing of the re-change varies for each reel 31 by a random delay. Thereby, control is performed so as not to assist in pushing in the game after the pseudo game.

(2) Myslo game It is also possible to execute a myslo game using the slot machine 10.
Here, “Myslo game” has the following contents.
The slot machine 10 stores a player's game history (the number of games, the number of ART wins, etc.). At the end of the game, the slot machine 10 displays the game history on the image display device 23 as a two-dimensional code.

  The player reads the two-dimensional code with the player's own portable communication terminal (such as a smartphone equipped with a CCD capable of reading the two-dimensional code) and accesses a server computer operated by the manufacturer of the slot machine 10 or the like. The server computer stores the latest game history of the player. Further, the server computer issues a password to the mobile communication terminal held by the player. The player can take over the game history by entering the password at the start of the game and starting the game.

In such a myslo game, the game history is stored in the RWM 81. When the RWM 81 is simply initialized when the power is turned on / off, there are a case where the game history is set to be erased and a case where the game history is set not to be erased.
Further, at the time of initialization when the setting change is started, the game history is deleted including the game history.

For example, if the game history is deleted when the power is turned on, the behavior when the setting change is started is the same as when the setting change is started. It is possible not to inform the player of this.
In addition, if the game history is uniformly erased when the power is turned off, the player will be disadvantaged if an unintended power cut occurs during the game. Therefore, the time is counted from the time when the power is turned off, and if a predetermined time (for example, 2 hours) has elapsed, the game history is erased when the power is turned on, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the game history is retained when the power is turned on. It may be.

  This game history is not limited to the above-mentioned myslo game, but for example, the number of executions related to the game displayed on the image display device 23 (the number of normal games, the number of ART games, the number of games indicating the chance zone) is controlled in the same manner. Can be.

(3) In the above embodiment, the game state (RT) is changed, and ART is executed when the state is changed to RT2.
On the other hand, it is also possible to control the gaming state as follows.
First, an MB (special role) that carries over the winning is provided, and control is performed so that the MB is difficult to win even when the MB is won. For example, MB allows winnings on the condition that the pressing order is middle right and left, and sets the pressing order as a penalty pressing order. As a result, the stop switch 42 is not operated in the pressing order unless the player intentionally reversely presses or makes an operation error. For this reason, MB will not win. Therefore, after winning the MB, the MB does not win, that is, the game inside the MB continues for a long time. Therefore, since it is rare that the winning MB wins, MB games are rarely executed. For this reason, the game inside MB continues continuously.

In the game inside the MB, non-AT, AT preparation, and AT are provided as internal states, and the transition from non-AT to AT is not accompanied by RT (game state) transition.
Further, the non-AT has a low probability, a normal probability, and a high probability that the probability of winning the AT is different. If an AT is won during these low, normal, and high probabilities, the game moves to a precursor, which is a game period before the start of AT, although the AT is won. During this sign, the player is informed that the AT has been won.
Also, the period between the end of the warning and the start of AT is AT preparation. Furthermore, the AT has a normal probability and a high probability of different expected values on which the number of games of the AT is added.

The transition of these internal states is performed by a winning combination in the game. Further, the transition from one internal state to another internal state is performed at the end of the game in the one internal state (when all the reels 31 are stopped and the game result of the game is displayed).
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to a precursor among the internal states, it corresponds to winning of the AT.
The game state and the internal state as described above may be used.

(4) Other Examples Regarding the Main Control Board 60 In the present embodiment, the number of main control boards 60 is one, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of separate bodies may be used (main control boards 60A and 60B). ...). Each main control board includes a CPU and an RWM independently. Moreover, when two main control boards 60 are provided, for example, both are comprised so that transmission / reception of information is possible by bidirectional | two-way communication. Then, any one of the main control board 60 and the sub control board 80 is connected so as to perform one-way communication from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80.

Further, when a plurality of main control boards 60 are provided, it is possible to arbitrarily set which main control board 60 and which game peripheral device are connected in FIG. For example, the main control board 60 is composed of a first main control board 60A and a second main control board 60B, and the first main control board 60A is in charge of the lottery of the role, the reel 31 stop control, and the ART control. The second main control board 60B is in charge of control such as medal insertion (betting), payout, storage, and settlement. In this case, a start switch 41, a stop switch 42, a motor 32, and the like are connected to the first main control board 60A, and a bet switch 40, a settlement switch 43, and the like are connected to the second main control board 60B.
Further, when a plurality of main control boards 60 are provided, all the main control boards 60 are accommodated in the board case and caulked.

(5) Other Examples Regarding Penalty State In this embodiment, when an irregular push is performed during non-ART, the penalty state is set, but the penalty state may be set to be releasable.
For example, a setting may be made such that the penalty state is canceled by turning on / off the power. When the penalty state is set by irregular pressing during non-ART, the penalty flag is turned on (stored in the RWM 61). Then, when the power is turned off or turned on, the penalty flag stored in the RWM 61 is turned off (cleared).

Further, when the penalty state is set, the time is measured, and when the predetermined time has elapsed, the penalty state can be automatically canceled. With this setting, the penalty state can be automatically canceled without turning on / off the power by the hall clerk. Furthermore, even if there is a player who intentionally repeats the penalty operation (an irregular push), it is necessary to wait for a predetermined time for each penalty operation. Can be prevented.
Furthermore, for example, a penalty state of 10 seconds is set when the first irregular pressing is performed (the penalty state is canceled when 10 seconds are counted by the timer), and a penalty state of 30 seconds is set when the second irregular pressing is performed, It may be set so that the penalty state cannot be canceled unless the power is turned on / off at the third irregular pressing.

In addition, the penalty state is canceled by a specific operation of the operation switch (input of a specific pattern) by a player or hall clerk (including managers such as store managers; the same applies hereinafter) without turning the power on / off Set to be. For example, simultaneous pressing of a plurality of switches and operation of a plurality of switches in a predetermined order can be mentioned.
Furthermore, for example, the penalty state may be canceled on the condition that the front cover 11 of the slot machine 10 is opened, the on / off of the door switch 16 is detected, and the reset switch 53 is turned on. As a result, the hall clerk can easily release the penalty state.

Furthermore, in order to make it easier for the hall side to grasp the table set in the penalty state, when it is set in the penalty state, a penalty signal (external signal) is transmitted to the external concentration terminal board 100, Information is received by hall computer.
Thereby, on the hall side, it is possible to easily grasp which table is set to the penalty state, and it is possible to instruct the store clerk to release the penalty state of the table.
In particular, if the penalty push order is repeated frequently, a signal to that effect is transmitted to the hall computer. As a result, the hall side can easily identify a suspicious player.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the penalty state is set, although it is disadvantageous to the player due to AT lottery or the like, there is no problem in proceeding with the game itself. On the other hand, when the penalty state is set, it is also possible to control so that the game cannot proceed. As a method for preventing the game from proceeding, for example, use of freeze is cited.
Then, when the penalty condition release condition is satisfied, control is performed so that the freeze is released and the penalty state is released.

  Moreover, in the said embodiment, even if it is a time when a player presses irregularly and sets to a penalty state, that is not alert | reported during a penalty state. When an irregular push is performed, it is possible to output a warning sound at that time (for example, when the right stop switch 42 is operated when the first right stop is performed during non-ART). It is.

Therefore, in order to enable the player to determine whether or not the current state is set to the penalty state, using the image display device 23 or the like, while the penalty state is set, a notification that the penalty state is in effect. It is also possible to perform. For example, a “!” Mark may be displayed on the image display device 23, or the effect lamp 21 may be lit in a color and lighting (flashing) pattern peculiar to the penalty state.
Further, a notification means (on the main side) electrically connected to the main control board 60 may be provided, and the notification means may be used to notify that it is in a penalty state (notification of a penalty state by the main side).

When the image display device 23 or the like is informed that it is in a penalty state, when a player wants to start a game on the stand, for example, a hall clerk is called and the power is turned on / off. In this way, the penalty state can be canceled. Thereby, the player can avoid starting the game from the penalty state, and can ensure the fairness of the game. Alternatively, when the penalty state is canceled at the elapsed time as described above, it is possible to wait for a game to be played on the stand until the penalty state is canceled.
When the penalty state is released, control is performed so as to end the notification and display indicating that the penalty state is present.

In the above-described embodiment, the penalty state is set by irregular pressing (operating in the penalty pressing order) at the time of winning the bell. On the other hand, it is possible not to set the penalty state only by pressing the irregularity, but to set the penalty state when the bell is won as a result of the irregular pressing, and to notify the fact.
First, a penalty state is set only when the bell 01 (eight winning combination) is won and a notification to that effect is given.
For example, in the case of a bell win A1 during a non-ART, if the middle first stop is operated, there is a possibility that eight winning combinations will win, so at this point, the penalty preliminary state is set. On the other hand, at the time of the first stop on the right, since there is no possibility of winning eight winning combinations, the penalty state is not set.

  Further, when the second left stop is made after the middle first stop, the winning combination of eight sheets is decided at this time, so the penalty state is set. That is, the last right stop switch 42 has not been operated and the bell 01 has not won a prize, but the winning of the bell 01 is confirmed at the time of the middle first stop and the second left stop. Set to. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the right third stop may be performed, and it may be set to the penalty state after determining that all the reels 31 have stopped and the bell 01 has won.

  On the other hand, when it becomes the second stop on the right after the middle first stop, the non-winning of the bell 01 (8-piece combination) is confirmed at that time, so the penalty preliminary state at the middle first stop is released ( The notification that it is in the penalty preliminary state is terminated). Therefore, the penalty state is not set when the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing the middle right and left during the bell winning A1.

Similarly, the other bell winnings A2 to A8 are set to the penalty state when the bell 01 (eight) is won (or when the winning is confirmed), and not set to the penalty state at the time of one bell winning or the velvet box.
It should be noted that even if the bell 01 (eight pieces) is won by the forward push or the forward pinching when the bells B1 to B4 are selected, since it is not an irregular push (penalty push order), of course, the penalty state is not set.

Secondly, it is set to a penalty state when a bell 01 (eight-piece combination) or one bell is won, and not set to a penalty state when a bell is missed.
For example, when winning the bell A1, the winning of the bell 01 (eight bells) or one bell is confirmed at the middle first stop, so the penalty state is set at this time. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be set to a penalty state after determining that the third stop is performed, all the reels 31 are stopped, and one or eight bells have been won.

At the time of the first stop on the right, there is a possibility of entering a penalty state at this time, so that a penalty preliminary state is set.
On the other hand, at the time of the first stop on the left, there is a possibility of winning a single winning combination with a probability of “1/8”, but since the pressing order is not the penalty pressing order, the single winning combination is temporarily won by pressing forward. Even if it is not set to the penalty state.

At the first stop on the right, one bell wins with a probability of “1/4”, but when one bell is won, it is set to the penalty state, and when the bell is not won (when Berkoboshi) Do not set a penalty state.
Similarly, the other bell wins A2 to A8 are set to the penalty state when the bell 01 (eight) or one bell wins, and not set to the penalty state when the bell is struck.

  Note that in the present embodiment, the penalty state is not set when the bell 01 is not won due to the irregular pressing during the bell wins B1 to B4 (when one bell is won). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a penalty state may be set at the time of anomaly pressing at the time of bell win B1-4.

Further, in the case of controlling to set the penalty preliminary state or not to set the penalty state as described above, the notification is controlled as follows.
For example, it is assumed that the penalty state is set only when the bell 01 (eight winning combination) is won in the bell winning A1.
In this case, since the penalty state is not set at the left or right first stop, no notification regarding the penalty state is performed at all, or at the first right stop, a notification such as “Warning about irregular pressing!” Is performed.
On the other hand, at the time of the middle first stop, there is a possibility of winning the bell 01 and it is set in the penalty preliminary state. At this time, for example, the image display state by the image display device 23 is darkened, and attention is urged. That is, it is notified that there is a possibility of being set to a penalty state (that it is a penalty reserve state).

Next, when the player operates the left stop switch 42 as the second stop, the penalty state is fixed at that time, so that the player is notified that the penalty state is set. For example, “Penalty occurred”, “Penalty”, etc. are displayed on the image display device.
On the other hand, when the player operates the right stop switch 42 as the second stop, since it is determined that the penalty state is not set at that time, the above-described dark state of the image display state (the penalty preliminary state is established). Control to return the notification to the original state.

(6) Depending on the RT state, it is possible to vary the stop control of the reels 31 corresponding to the pressing order when the bell is won.
A winning flag in the game is different between a non-internal medium game that has not won 1BB and an internal medium game that has carried over the winning of 1BB. For this reason, when a small role that does not carry over the winning in the game or a replay is won, the stop control of the reel 31 can be made different between the non-internal medium game and the internal medium game.
Therefore, depending on the RT state, when the winning combination with different game results depending on the pressing order is selected, the reel 31 is controlled to stop differently.
The winning of the special role such as 1BB is “actual operation”, but if the change of the RT state is regarded as similar to the operation of the accessory, it is possible to vary the stop control of the reel 31 according to the RT state. Become.

For example, the reel 31 stop control when the bells A1 to B4 are won in RT1 is as described in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, when the bell is won at RT2, the push order of 6 choices may be changed to 3 choices.
For example, when the bell A1 is won, the middle and left and right (in the push order correct answer) stop position determination table is used in the same way as in the above embodiment. The stop position determination table is used. Thereby, at the time of the middle first stop, it becomes a pushing correct answer, and bell 01 (8 sheets) wins.
Further, at the time of the first left stop, the stop position determination table for the middle right and left times in the above embodiment is used. Thus, at the time of the first stop on the left, the bell 03 is won with “PB = 1”.
Further, at the time of the first right stop, the stop position determination table at the time of the first right stop is used as in the above embodiment. Thus, at the time of the first stop on the right, the bell 04a is won with a probability of “1/4”.
The change of the stop control as described above is also applied to other bell wins.

  Furthermore, in addition to changing the stop control of the reel 31 according to the above-described RT state, the stop control of the reel 31 may be changed based on the presence or absence of AT (ON / OFF of the AT flag). That is, by handling the AT flag in the same manner as the winning flag related to the special combination, even if the RT state is not different, the stop control of the reel 31 is made different based on on / off of the AT flag. In the case of non-AT (when the AT flag is off), the selection order is 6 choices when the bell is elected as in the above embodiment, and in the case of AT (when the AT flag is on), the push order is changed to 3 choices as described above. .

(7) Change in expected number of medals earned when winning the push order bell In order to ensure that the player digests the game with positive push, for example, the left middle right push order is the most advantageous ( Setting it to be the highest).
Specifically, by increasing the number of winning B1 and B2 wins, the rate at which the left, middle and right are pushed out is increased.

For example, in the said embodiment, setting the number of selection of Bell B1 and B2 to about "1890" is mentioned. In this case, the winning number of the bells B3 and B4 is set to “1260” which is the same as when the bell A1 is won. By setting in this way, the total of “the number of tokens x expected medal acquisition value in the order of pressing” at the time of “left middle right” is
(1260 × 0.125) × 8 + 1890 × 8 × 2 + 1260 × 1 × 2
= 30420 (Expected value for medal acquisition = about 0.46)
This is the same as the above embodiment.

On the other hand, in another pressing order, for example, “left and right middle”, for example, the sum of “number × expected medal acquisition expected value in the pressing order” is
(1260 × 0.125) × 8 + 1890 × 1 × 2 + 1260 × 8 × 2
= 25200 (expected value for medal acquisition = about 0.38)
It becomes.
If set in this way, the left middle right push order is most advantageous, and the player should digest the game in the left middle right push order. Therefore, there is a possibility that the penalty state at the time of irregular pressing is unnecessary.

Furthermore, there is a method of increasing the output rate (base) at normal time (during non-ART) by setting the acquisition rate of one bell high during forward pressing. If the base at the time of forward pushing in the normal time can be raised, it becomes easier to respond to the nice that “the rate of play will satisfy a certain value even if the game is digested by pushing forward.”
For example, in any of the bells A1 to A8 winning, when the first left stop, it is set so that one bell wins with “PB = 1”. Thus, if the game is digested with the first stop on the left, it will not be missed when the bell is won. It should be noted that when the bells B1 to B4 are selected, the bell is not missed even in the above embodiment.

  (8) In this embodiment, the setting door that covers the setting change / reset switch 53 is provided, and the opening / closing of the setting door is detected by detecting the on / off of the setting door switch 54. However, the setting door is not necessarily provided. When the setting door (setting door switch 54) is not provided, the D2 bit of the input port 1 and the D2 bit such as the input port 1 level data are not used.

(9) In the present embodiment, control is performed so as to start the settlement process based on the rising data relating to the settlement switch 43. That is, the settlement process is started by operating the settlement switch 43.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the settlement process may be started by continuing to operate the settlement switch 43 for a certain period of time (keep pressing).
For example, when the level data related to the settlement switch 43 is continuously on for 500 interrupts (≈about 1100 ms), the settlement process is started.

(10) In the embodiment, when the settlement switch 43 is operated, when there is a bet medal, the bet medal is settled first. Therefore, in the case of having both a bet medal and a stored medal, it is necessary to operate the settlement switch 43 twice to settle both.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be controlled so that both the bet medals and the stored medals can be settled by operating the settlement switch 43 once (however, only when the replay is not activated).

  (11) In this embodiment, the data of the operation switches (the settlement switch 43, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42) that can be operated by the player are stored as 8-bit 1-byte data (data string). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the level data of each operation switch may be stored in a predetermined storage area (address). For example, in the present embodiment, the data of each signal of the bet switch 40 and the settlement switch 43 is stored in one byte and processed at the same time, but can be stored individually.

However, as in this embodiment, if the data of each operation switch is stored as 1-byte data and is read in a batch, the data of all the operation switches can be acquired in one reading process, and the processing speed Can be improved and the processing can be simplified.
Furthermore, since the control processing is executed in the main processing based on the rising data for these data, it is possible to generate the rising data in a lump, and the processing can be further simplified. .

(12) In a single interrupt process, the input port data is acquired only once to generate the input port level data and the input port rising data, and the data is acquired a plurality of times in a single interrupt process. The method of generating the input port rising data is shown.
Here, when data is acquired a plurality of times in one interrupt process, the signals of some bits of the data acquired a plurality of times match, but the signals of some other bits match. The case where it does not think is possible.

  In such a case, as described above, the level data of the bit is generated by performing the AND operation, but not limited to this, the level data in the interrupt processing is not stored for the signal of the bit that does not match. It is also possible. Furthermore, for the bit level data not stored in the interrupt processing, the bit level data in the previous interrupt processing may be used.

(13) In the present embodiment, the error number is displayed by the acquisition number display LED 72, but may be displayed by the storage number display LED 71 instead.
Further, while the setting is being changed, the storage number display LED 71 is not displayed and “-” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 72, but the same display as during the setting confirmation may be performed.
Furthermore, without providing the set value display LED 63, either the stored number display LED 71 or the acquired number display LED 72 may be used also as the set value display LED. For example, when the acquired number display LED 72 is also used as the set value display LED, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the upper digit is turned off, the lower digit is turned on and the set value is displayed.

(14) The set value display LED 63 is composed of eight elements in which “.” Is further added to the seven segments. When the setting is changed, the set value and “.” Are displayed. If “.” Is confirmed, “.” May be turned off. In this case, it is preferable to turn off the “.” When confirming the setting.
(15) When a medal is bet (including an automatic bet based on a replay winning), the setting may not be confirmed.

  (16) In this embodiment, control is performed so that the external signal 4 is output when the setting key switch signal is ON. Here, when it is detected that the setting key switch signal is turned on once, the external signal 4 may be continuously output until a predetermined time elapses. In this way, the external signal 4 can continue to be output even if the setting change key is removed during the setting change process, which can be useful for preventing a setting change operation or the like.

  (17) During the setting change or setting confirmation processing, various settings may be enabled on the sub-control board 80 side using the push button 24 or the cross key 25 (sub-side button). For example, a change in the volume of the speaker 22, a change in the display of a two-dimensional code in a myslo game, a change in the display content of the game history, a change in the lighting mode of the effect lamp 21, a confirmation of an error history, a time setting and the like can be mentioned.

(18) In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the “C0” error is an error relating to the abnormality of the closing sensor 2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an abnormality of the closing sensor 1 is detected, it may be detected as a “C0” error or another error.
(19) The medal payout signal may be output after the medal payout process or may be performed simultaneously with the medal payout process.
(20) Two payout sensors 1 and 2 are provided in the present embodiment, but may be one.

(21) In the flowchart shown in the present embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure. When the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing can be changed. .
(22) In this embodiment, the slot machine 10 is taken as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a ball game machine, an enclosed game machine, and the like.
(23) The present embodiment and the above-described various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in appropriate combination.

<Appendix>
Problems to be solved by the invention (original invention) according to the initial claims of the present application, means for solving the problems related to the original invention, and effects of the original invention are as follows.
(A) Problems to be solved by the original invention In the conventional technology, unless the data of the RWM is erased due to the power interruption, there is a risk that an unintended control process may be executed upon recovery from the power interruption.
Specifically, for example, when the setting change switch is in the ON state, the power is cut off, and the setting change switch is turned off while the power is turned off. Then, when the power is turned on, the setting change switch is turned on when the power is turned off. May remain, and control processing based on the setting change switch being on may be executed.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to prevent an unintended control process from being executed based on data before the power is turned off when the power is turned off.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems Related to the Initial Invention (Note that the corresponding embodiment is described in parentheses)
The original invention solves the above-described problems by the following means. The configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown in parentheses.
The first solution is
The main process (M_MAIN) that controls the progress of the game,
An interrupt process (I_INTR) that executes a process different from the main process by an interrupt during the execution of the main process,
Input port level data storage means (F00A; input port 1 level data) for storing data indicating ON / OFF of the input port;
Input port falling data storage means (F00C; input port 1 falling data) for storing falling data indicating that the input port has been turned off.
The main process is:
When the power supply is recovered from the power interruption, the input port signal is read, and the data in the input port level data storage means is updated based on the read input port signal (steps S836 and S837).
After updating the data in the input port level data storage means, interrupt processing is executed (step S840),
In the interrupt processing,
The input port signal reading process is periodically executed, and the data of the input port level data storage unit and the data of the input port falling data storage unit are updated based on the read input port signal. (Step S607)
It is characterized by that.

The second solution is
The main process (M_MAIN) that controls the progress of the game,
An interrupt process (I_INTR) that executes a process different from the main process by an interrupt during the execution of the main process,
Input port level data storage means (F00A; input port 1 level data) for storing data indicating ON / OFF of the input port;
In the main process,
When the power supply is recovered from the power interruption, the input port signal is read, and the data in the input port level data storage means is updated based on the read input port signal (steps S836 and S837).
After updating the data in the input port level data storage means, interrupt processing is executed (step S840),
In the interrupt processing,
The input port signal reading process is periodically executed, and the data in the input port level data storage means is updated based on the read input port signal (step S607).
It is characterized by that.

The third solution means in the first or second solution means,
In the interrupt processing,
When power-off is detected, the output port is cleared, and power-off processing is executed to stop the operation based on the input of a reset signal.

(C) Effect of the original invention According to the initial invention, when the power is restored from the power-off, the data in the input port level data storage means (and the input port falling data storage means in the first solution means) is updated. Since the interrupt process is executed after the state is updated, it is possible to prevent an unintended control process from being executed when the power supply is restored from the power-off state.

10 Slot machines (gaming machines)
DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 11 Front cover 12 Base part 13 Display window 14 Discharge port 15 Medal tray 16 Door switch 21 Effect lamp 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 Push button 25 Cross key 31 Reel 32 Motor 35 Medal payout device 35a Hopper 35b Sub tank 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Dispensing sensor 38 Full sensor 39 Reel sensor 40 Bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settling switch 44 Medal insertion slot 45 Medal selector 46 Passage sensor 47 Blocker 48a, 48b Insertion sensor 50 Power supply unit 51 Power switch 52 Setting key switch 53 Setting Change / reset switch 54 Setting door switch 60 Main control board (main control means, game control means (board), main control board Means (substrate))
61 RWM
62 Main CPU
62a setting change means 62b role lottery means 62c reel control means 62d winning determination means 62e payout means 62f gaming state control means 62g command control means 63 set value display LED
70 Display board 71 Storage number display LED
72 Acquisition number display LED
73 Status display LED
73a Replay display LED
73b LED indicating that it can be inserted
73c Checkout LED
73d Game start LED
73e Single-load indicator LED
73f Two-sheet loading display LED
73g Three-sheet loading indicator LED
80 Sub-control board (sub-control means, production control means (board), sub-control means (board))
81 RWM
82 Sub CPU
82a Production output control means 100 External concentration terminal board

Claims (1)

Main processing to control the progress of the game,
During execution of the main process, it is possible to execute an interrupt process in which a process different from the main process is executed by an interrupt,
An input port to which the signal of the setting key switch that is operated when checking the setting value is input,
Input port level data storage means for storing data indicating ON / OFF of the setting key switch ;
Input port falling data storage means for storing falling data indicating that the setting key switch has been turned from on to off, and
Based on the operation of the setting key switch, it is possible to shift to a predetermined state in which a setting value can be confirmed,
Based on falling data of the setting key switch, the predetermined state can be terminated,
When recovering from power- off, before executing the interrupt process, the main process determines the data of the input port level data storage means and the input port fall based on the signal input to the input port. Update the data in the data storage means,
The interrupt process can be executed after the update,
Updating the data of the input port level data storage means and the data of the input port falling data storage means again based on the signal input to the input port by the interrupt processing after the update. To update the data stored in the input port falling data storage means to the latest data when the power supply is recovered from power failure .

Images